Digital PDFs

XX-EA35A-C4

April 1985

232 pages

Original

13MB

Document:	QV069-GZ Rainbow 100+ 100B Technical Documentation
Order Number:	XX-EA35A-C4
Revision:
Pages:	232
Original Filename:	http://bitsavers.org/pdf/dec/rainbow/QV069-GZ_Rainbow_100+_100B_Technical_Documentation_Apr85.pdf

OCR Text

QV069-GZ

lOO+/lOOB
Technical Documentation

digital equipment corporation

First Printing, June 1984
Second Printing, April 1985
© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984, 1985. All Rights Reserved.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should
not be construed as a commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license.
No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
CP/M and CP/M-86 are registered trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
CP/M-80 is a trademark of Digital Research Inc.
MS is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Z80 is a registered trademark of Zilog, Inc.

8088 is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DD~D'M
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP
P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX

UNIBUS
VAX
VMS
VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

100 + 11 OOB Technical Documentation

Recommended Documents
Contains a list of additional reading materials.

Rainbow 100 + /1 OOB System Specification
This specification describes the hardware and the firmware for the Rainbow 100 + 1100B computers. Discussions of each of the standard and optional components of the Rainbow 100B system unit
are included. The system motherboard description discusses the dual-processor architecture, local
bus structures, standard video and communications interfaces, memory and I/O maps, and register
bit-formats. The VT102 terminal emulation firmware description includes the variations from the
standard VT102. Operating system support firmware is also discussed.

Rainbow 100 + /1 OOB Terminal Emulation Manual
This document discusses each terminal key character, processing of received characters, and use of
control functions. The appendixes list character codes and control functions along with the ANSI
code extension techniques for escape and control sequences. There is a description of the Rainbow
computer and VT102 terminal differences and a series of international keyboard illustrations.

Rainbow 100 Technical Manual
This manual describes how the Rainbow computer operates. It includes explanations of the features, capabilities, system architecture, and technical characteristics of the Rainbow computer.

Rainbow Color/Graphics Option Programmer's Reference Guide
This guide is written for the experienced systems programmer. The information contained in this
guide is operating system independent; however, it is specific to BOBB-based software and hardware. It is divided into the following parts:
Operating Principles

Gives an overview of the Graphics Option hardware and software.

Programming Guidelines

Discusses such aspects of programming as initialization, various.
write and read operations, notes, and timing considerations.

Reference Materials

Describes the option's registers, buffers, masks, and maps, and the
GDC register contents and supported GDC commands.

The two appendixes contain a specifications summary and a block diagram of the option.

INTEL. Specifications
The 8274 Multi-protocol Serial Controller (MPSC) and the 8237A18237A-5 High Performance
Programmable DMA Controller are intended for communications programmers or engineers responsible for integrating the controllers into hardware designs. They describe the controllers'
functions and general operations, and provide detailed programming specifications and hardware
interface information.
The synchronous and asynchronous communication documents are an aid for the less experienced
programmer who is implementing applications that use either synchronous or asynchronous communication techniques. They provide information on how to use MPSC in either synchronous or
asynchronous modes. They also include a number of examples and sample programs to aid the
programmer in developing communications applications.

HOW TO ORDER
ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
If you want to order additional documentation by phone:
And you live in:

Call:

Between the hours of:

New Hampshire, Alaska or
Hawaii

603-884-6660

8:30 AM and 6:00 PM
Eastern Time

Continental USA or Puerto Rico

1-800-258-1710

8:30 AM and 6:00PM
Eastern Time

Canada (Ottawa-Hull)

613-234-7726

8:00 AM and 5:00 PM
Eastern Time

Canada (British Columbia)

1-800-267-6146

8:00 AM and 5:00 PM
Eastern Time

Canada (all other)

112-800-267 -6146

8:00 AM and 5:00 PM
Eastern Time

If you want to order additional documentation by direct mail:

And you live in:

Write to:

USA or Puerto Rico

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
ATTN: Peripherals and Supplies Group
P.O. Box CS2008
Nashua, NH 03061
NOTE: Prepaid orders from Puerto Rico must be
placed with the local DIGITAL subsidiary
(Phone 809-754-7575)
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT OF CANADA LTD.
940 Belfast Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1G 4C2
Attn: P&SG Business Manager
DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
Peripherals and Supplies Group
P&SG Business Manager
clo Digital's local subsidiary or approved distributor

Canada

Other than USA,
Puerto Rico or Canada

TO ORDER MANUALS WITH EK PART NUMBERS
WRITE OR CALL
P&CS PUBLICATIONS
Circulation Services
10 Forbes Road
NR03/W3

Northboro, Massachusetts 01532
(617)351-4325

~ded

Documents

Other Technical Documentation Kits
1.

Rainbow CP/M-S6/S0 V2.0 Technical Documentation (QV067-GZ)

2. Rainbow Ms.-DOS V2.05 Technical Documentation (QV068-GZ)

Additional Documents
1.

Letterprinter 100 User Documentation Package CEK-LPIOO-UG)
Includes:
Letterprinter 100 Operator Guide
LAlOO-Series Programmer Reference Manual
Letterprinter 100 Installation Guide
Letterprinter 100 Operator and Programmer Reference Card

2. Letterwriter 100 User Documentation Package (EK-LWlOO-UG)
Includes:
Letterwriter 100 Operator Guide
Letterwriter 100 Installation Guide
LAIOO-Series Programmer Reference Manual
3. Installing and Using the LQP02 Printer CAA-L662B-TK)
4.

Installing and Using the LA50 Printer (EK-OLA50-UG)
Includes:
LA50 Printer Programmer Reference Manual

5. Rainbow 100 Extended Communications Option Programmer's Reference
Guide CAA-V172A-TV)
6. PCIOO Rainbow 100B System Unit IPB CEK-SBIOO-IP)
7.

VTI02 Video Terminal User Guide CEK-VTl02-UG)

S. CP/M Operating System Manual CAA-X637 A-TV)

lOO+/lOOB
System Specification

digital equipment corporation

First Printing, Junef9~
© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights Reserved.

The inforrn/itionin thi~ document is subject ~o change withoufl;otice and.should
a commitment by DigltafEquipment Corporation. Digital
not be construed
Equipment Cc:il'~oration assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.

Th~sc:iftware (:\escrib9d in this document is furnishedllhder a license and may
only'be used or copied in accordance with the t~rm~.of such license.

No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its. affiliated companies,
.
CP/M and CP/M-86 are registered trademarks of Digital Research Inc.
CP/M-80 is a trademark of Digital Research Inc.
Z80 is a registered trademark of Zilog, Inc.
8088 is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~DmDDmDTM
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP

P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX

UNIBUS
VAX
VMS

VT
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS/REVISION STATUS
Subhead

Title

page

Ti tle Page
Table of Contents/Revision status

1
2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

BASE SYSTEM

3
3.1
3.2

SYSTEM MODULES
MOTHER BOARD
OPTION MODULES

5
5
38

RX50 DRIVE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS
TRACK FORMAT
HEADER FORMAT

45
45
45
45
46

PC100-B FIRMWARE
PRODUCT GOALS
Functional Anomalies
PERFORMANCE
NON-GOALS
GENERAL
Text Str ings
Character Sets
START-UP/SHUT-DCWN/RESET
Power-Up Initialization
Selection of Keyboard/Language
Power-Off
Hardware Resetting
RAM Par i ty Error
MEMORY-MAPPED VIDEO ACCESS SERVICE
KEY ACCESS SERVICE

47
47

4.1
4.2

4.3
4.4
5
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5

5.6
5.7

48
51
51
51
53
53
61
61
61
62
62
62
63
64

FUNCTIONAL DEFINITION
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
CLUSTERING OF LANGUAGES
TRANSMITTED CHARACTERS
RECEIVED CHARACTER PROCESSING
VT102 CONTROL OF ATTACHED DEVICES
OTHER DIFFERENCES - TERMINAL VS CONSOLE
MODES

65
65
65
66
78
79

84
84
84

7.3

EXTERNAL INTERACTIONS
OPERATING SYSTEM
STACK OVERHEAD
STACK USE BY APPLICATIONS

8
8.1
8.2

VT102
SET-UP
RESET TECHNIQUE

84
84

6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
7
7.1
7.2

PCU9-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS/REVISION STATUS (Continued)
Subhead

Title

Page

INTERFACE LAYER
SOFTWARE INTERRUPT TYPE 40 (DECIMAL)

90
90

IMAGE OF Z80 RAM SPACE TO BE LOADED

BOOT LOADER TO READ TRACK 0, SECTOR 1
OF FLOPPY

MENU SELECTION PROCESS

102

SYSTEM PARAMETER INFORMATION

103

DIAGNOSTIC AND MANUFACTURING SUPPORT

104

POWER SUPPLY

106

16
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4

CONNECTOR OUTPUTS
VIDEO INTERFACE CONNECTOR
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CONNECTOR
PRINTER PORT INTERFACE CONNECTOR
FLOPPY INTERFACE CONNECTOR

108
108
109
111
112

OPTIONS

113

CABLES

114

ENVIRONMENTAL

114

RELIABILITY

114

PHYSICAL PACKAGING

114

VIDEO CHARACTER SET

115

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

115

9.1

PC199-B Specification
1

27-Feb-1984

Page 4

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The PCl@@-B system is a low-cost, user-installable personal business
computer used to run applications in the Fortune l00@ marketplace.
The
PCl@@-B provides hardware and software support for both stand-alone
processing and as a terminal emulation for DEC and other computer
manufacturer's systems.
The PC10@-B is designed to be used by users with no prior computer
experience. Applications software include packages designed by third party
software houses.

BASE SYSTEM

The base system consists of the following components:
2.1

BA2S-C

The BA25-C is the system nucleus. The mul ti-box is the primary housing for
the system, and encloses the following components:
a.

PCl@@-B System Module - The basic intell igence of the system and
provides the means for interconnection of all options. This module
includes the following features:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

2.2

8@88 CPU
Z8@A CPU
64KB unshared dynamic memory
64KB shared dynamic memory
32 to 64KB ROM
256 x 4 NVM
VTl@@ compatible DC@ll, DC@12 video electronics
Async/Bisync communications port
LA5@, LAl@@, LA12 Printer Port
LK2@1 Keyboard interface
RX5@ Floppy controller
Option expansion capability
Extended communications
Color graphics
Extended memory (64 to 768KB)

RX5@ Mini-Floppy Drive - A dual platter mini-floppy drive system
which is the main storage area for the system.

H7842-D Power Supply - A 14@ W switching regulator power supply
with a switch selectable l0@-12@/220-240 V primary circuit.

VR201-A MONITOR

A l2-inch diagonal composite monitor that supplies video information to the
user, as well as an interconnect means for the keyboard.

PC199-B Specification
2.3

Page 5

27-Feb-1984

LK29l-AA KEYBOARD

An ergonomic keyboard.supporting 135 keys. This is interconnected via a
coiled cord terminated in a four-conductor telephone plug.

SYSTEM MODULES

3.1

MOTHER BOARD

The PC130-B includes a two-processor architecture based on the simultaneous
operation of an 8388 and a Z80A CPU. These CPUs operate from and transfer
data through a shared block of 62KB of RAM. In addition to this block-of
shared memory, each processor has its own memory and peripheral circuitry.
Note
Because the floppy controller module
an integral part of the system, it
included in the mother board section.

is
is

In addition to running application/user software, each processor supports a
portion of the needed functions of the computer.
The Z80A processor
performs the func-tions required to read/write the floppy disks. The 8388
handles the video output, keyboard I/O, printer port and the communications
as well as any other options.
3.1.1

Mother Board Block Diagram

The Mother Board Block Diagram is shown in Figure 1.
3.1.2

8988 System

The 8388 microprocessor on the module controls n-early everything except the
floppy disk. The 8388 runs from a clock of 4.815 MHz and controls the
following:

o
o
o
o
o
o

Vide0
Keyb~ard

Pr inter
Communication line
Optional graphics board
Optional extended communications board

PC190-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 6

+----------------------INTERRUPT---------------------------------------+

+---l----+
Z80A

+I--~~~;~~--+I-+----DMA--------+-;;;~:~;~~~~i

+------+
------

----8

+--------+
+--------+
2 KB
1
1UNSHARED -----RAM

+--------+

+--------+
RX50
DISK
DRIVE
I/F
+--------+

B
I
T
D
A
T
A

B
U

+------+

62 KB
I +------+
RAM
---+----------+ \

UNSR2HAAMK:ED

1---I

+----------+

WINCHESTER
DISK
OPTION

1 ~~ ~~ 1---ROM

+----------+
+----------+
OPTIONAL

+---------+

D
A

T
A

+---------+

B
U
S

KEYBOARD
I/F

+-------;..--+

+---------+

+---------+
+---------+

+------+

-----1

4 KB
SCREEN
---RAM
+---+------+

PRINTER
PORT

+---------+

4 KB
1---RAM
+----------+

+---------+

I ATTRIBUTE

COLOR
GRAPHICS
+------+

Figure 1.

+---------+
ASYNC/
----- BISYNC
COMMS
I

+----------+
DC 11/12 1
---1 VIDEO
CONTROLLER
+----------+

------+

8088

RAM
(64 KB to
768 KBj

I I

+------------+
+---------+

1-+
~
1 U~:H~:ED
RAM
----

+----------+

+---------+

Mother Board Block Diagram

The 8088 also controls the Z80A's RESET line, as it can start/stop the Z80A
at will.
The clock time on the 8088 is approx imately 208 nanoseconds.
Contention from either the Z80A or refresh can cause wait states.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 7

3.1.3 8088 Memory
The 8088 has several different types of memory available for its use:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

l28KB dynamic memory (62KB shared)
32 to 64KB ROM
4KB video screen memory (static)
4KB video attribute memory (static)
256X4 NVM with shadow RAM
64KB to 768KB optional unshared dynamic memory

3.1.3.1 Standard Memory - The 128 KB of standard memory is partitioned
into a low order 64 KB bank and a high order 64 KB bank.
62 KB of the low
order 64 KB bank is addressable by, and therefore accessible to, the Z80A
processor.
The Z80A is unable to address (and therefore can't modify) the
first 2KB portion of this bank. Therefore, the 8088 keeps its interrupt
vectors and some other information safe from being molested by a Z80A
application.
The high order 64 KB bank of standard memory is accessible to the 8088 via
the same memory bus as the lower 64 KB of standard memory.
It is not
addressable by the Z80A, and thus is not shared, but Z80A accesses to the
low order 64K bank utili ze the standard memory bus, causing the 8088 to
incur wait states when 8088 access to the high order 64 KB bank of standard
memory coincide with Z80A accesses to the low order 64 KB bank.
If there is no contention for the standard memory bus at the time of an
8088 access, no wait states are required for the cycle.
If the bus is busy
due to a refresh cycle, DMA cycle, or a Z80A memory cycle, which was
initiated prior to the 8088's request, wait states will occur until the
request can be filled.
Refresh has the highest priority for memory cycles.
DMA has the second
highest priority for memory cycles.
The processors have the lowest
priority. The 8088 has approximately equal priority with the Z80A.
No parity generaton/checking is implemented for the standard 128 KB memory.
3.1.3.2 ROM - There is 32 to 64KB of ROM (two sockets) on the module which
is addressable by the 8088.
The ROM contains Z80A code and 8088 code for
diagnostics, bootstrap, and VT102 emulation. The code for the Z80A must be
moved into shared memory by the 8088 in order to be executed by the Z80A.
No wait states are required when the 8088 accesses this memory; however,
because the circuitry assumes that all memory is dynamic RAM, wait states
will be executed whenever refresh cycles are in progress.
Supported ROMs
are of the 27128/27256 pinout variety, with access times <= 450 nsec.
Each
ROM socket has a jumper associated with it, to select the 27128 (128 K bit)
pinout or the 27256 (256 K bi t) pinout.
The default condition is with the
jumper absent, selecting the 27128 type pinout.
3.1.3.3 4KB Screen Memory and 4KB Attribute Memory - There is screen and
attribute memory available to the 8088 which allows it to control what is
on the CRT display.
This memory is available to the 8088 90 percent of the
time.
In the remaining ten percent, the DC0ll and DC0l2 have access to
thi s memory and prohibi t the 8088 from access.
Wai t sta tes to the 8088
occurs dur ing refresh cycles and while the DC0ll and DC0l2 are using the

PC190-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 8

memory.
The worst case time in which the 81388 can be held ina wait state
due to contention with the DC13ll and DC1312 is approximately 1213
microseconds.
3.1.3.4 256 X 4 NVM with Shadow RAM - The PCl1313-B mother board contains
11324 bits of non-volatile storage that is organized 256 x 4.
The NVM, as
it is called, is located on the 81388 CPU bus at address 13ED131313H through
13ED0FFH and the data path to the dev ice is through data bits 13, 1, 2, and
3.
Phantom images of the NVM exist from address 13EDl1313H through 13EDFFFH.
The device contains a 256 x 4 bit static RAM that performs as any other
static memory. The device also contains a 256 x 4 bit non-volatile memory
that is overlaid with the 256 x 4 bit static memory.
On initialization,
the 81388 does a RECALL of the NVM which places that data into the static
memory.
At this time, any read or write to the memory occurs to the static
memory_ The RECALL is done via a bit in the Diagnostic write register. On
power-up, this bit is set to a 13, and must be set to a 1 by firmware before
data from the NVM RAM is available.
To perform a RECALL, the bit is set to a 13 and then set back to 1. The
minimum width for this pulse is 4513 ns.
The data is available immediately
after the RECALL bit. is reset. The data that is in the static memory
portion can be stored in the NVM by the 81388 CPU via the PROGRAM NVM bit
also located in the Diagnostic write register. This bit is also set to a 13
on power-up.
To perform a PROGRAM NVM operation, the bit is set to a land
then back to a 13.
This pulse has a minimum width of 11313 ns.
Once the
PROGRAM NVM bi t has met the minimum pulse width it can be. removed, however,
the device cannot be accessed by the CPU for 113 ms.
At this time, the
device is in the process of storing the data into the NVM.
There is no
indication to the CPU that the device is done other than 113 ms has passed.
If another operation is done on the device during those 10 ms, it will be
ignored. Once the operation is started, it cannot be terminated unless the
power is turned off.
In this case, data in the device is not valid.
3.1.3.5 Optional (Unshared ) Dynamic Memory - The module can optionally be
expanded with 64KB to 768KB of memory for use by the 8088.
If installed,
this memory is always available and never requires wait states (except when
the memory cycle .contends with a refresh cycle) •

PC1ee-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 9

3.1.3.6 8e88 I/O Map - The 81888 I/O map follows:
PORT H
f8f8H
f818H
182H
182H
184H
186H
188H
18AH
18AH
18CH
18EH
10H
11H
218H-2FH
318H-3FH
418H
41H
42H
43H
518H-5FH
618H-6FH
70H-7FH

FUNCTION
Interrupts Z818A Flop (Write)
Clears 81888 Interrupt Flop (Read)
Communications and LED Register
General Communications Status
OC011 Write Register
Communications Bit Rate Register
Option Present Status Register
Maintenance Port
Maintenance Port
OCf812 write Register
printer Bit Rate Register
Keyboard Data Register (8251A)
Keyboard Control/Status Register(8251A)
Ext.
Comm.
Option/Option Select 1
Ext. Comm.
Option/Option Select 3
Comm Data Reg.
(7201)
Pr inter Oa ta Reg.
(7201)
Comm Control/Status Reg.
(7201)
printer Control/Status Reg.
(7201)
Graphics Option Select
Ex t. Comm. option/Option Select 2
Ext.
Comm.
Option/Option Select 4

WO
RO
WO
WO
RO
WO
RO
WO
wo
RO/WO
RO/WO
RO/WO
RO/WO
RO/WO
RO/WO
R/W

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-.1984

Page 19

3.1.3.7 8988 Memory Map - The 8088 memory map is shown in Figure 2.

FFFFF
ROM 1 (BOOT)
(256 K bi t)
(optional)

ROM 1 (BOOT)
(128 K bi t)
FC999
ROM 1 (BOOT)
(aliased)
F8999

ROM 9
(256 K bit)
(optional)

ROM 9
(128 k bit)
F4909
ROM 9
(aliased)

--------------+-------------ATTRIBUTE RAM
EF999
SCREEN RAM
EE999
NVM (aliased)
ED9FF
NVM
ED999
NVM ( aliased)
EC999

~----------------------------~ DFFFF
OPTION RAM
29999
STANDARD RAM (UNSHARED)
----------------------------STANDARD RAM (SHARED)

Figure 2.

8988 Memory Map

19999

PC199-B Specification

Page 11

27-Feb-1984

3.1.3.8 8988 Interrupts - The fOllowing table lists the 8088 interrupts.
Values given are in hexadecimal. The values are listed for VECTOR SEL
1
(default condition), and for VECTOR SEL = 0 (relocated vectors) •
priority

Highest

Lowest

Interrupt Source

Memory Parity Error Interrupt (NMI)
Vertical Frequency Interrupt
Extended Comms Interrupt 1
(optional)
Graphics
DMA Controller Interrupt
(from Optional Extended
Comm. Board)
Comm./Printer (7201) Interrupt
Extended Comms Interrupt 0
(optional)
Keyboard (8251A) Interrupt
Interrupt fromZ80A

Interrupt
Type

Vector
Address

VECTOR SEL
1 (9)

02 (02)
20 (A0)
21 (Al)

(08) (08 )
80 (280 )
84 (284)

22 (A2)
23 (A3)

88 (288 )
8C (28C)

24 (M)
25 (A5)

90 (290)
94 (294 )

26 (A6)
27 (A7)

98 (298 )
9C (29C)

The VECTOR SEL control bit is used to relocate the hardware interrupt
vector space to accommodate the requirements of different operating
systems. The VECTOR SEL bit is implemented as VECTOR SEL L, using the DTR
L· output of the 8251A UART (keyboard serial port).
Refer to section
3.1.3.10 for a more detailed description.
3.1.3.9 Video Subsystem: 8088 - The video subsystem resides on the mother
board and is controlled by the 8088.
The subsystem provides fully VT100compatible video features.
3.1.3.9.1 General Video
following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

Features

The

video

subsystem

supports

the

24 line x 83 column display
24 line x 137 column display
Smooth scrolling (full screen and split screen)
Double height lines
Double width lines
Reverse video
Bold
Blinking
Underline
j.
RS170 "like" composite video output
k. 255-character set
The software on the 8088 is able to vary the speed of the smooth scrolling,
(for example, 3, 6, 12, or 18 lines/sec).
The double height and double
width attributes may be selected on a line by line basis.
The other
attributes (reverse, bold, blink, and underline) may be selected on a
character-by-character basis.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 12

3.1.3.9.2 Video Memory - The video subsystem has 4KB of screen RAM and 4KB
of attribute RAM.
Only the four LSBs of the attribute RAM are actually
looked at by the video subsystem.
3.1.3.9.3 Video Processor (DC9ll And DC9l2) - When accessing the screen
RAM, the video processor generates the l2-bit address for a particular byte
in the lower 4KB bank (character RAM). The corresponding byte in the upper
4KB bank (attribute RAM) is selected also.
The two bytes are passed to the
video processor in parallel.
The video processor uses the character code to index into a character
generator and uses the attribute information to modify the video data.
The contents of the screen RAM directly control the display of the lines
and characters. This region of memory contains the displayable characters,
their attributes the line attributes, and the addresses that link one line
to the next.
The microprocessor modifies and updates this· information in
the intervals between the video processor's DMAs.
The video processor begins reading the screen RAM at the start of RAM
(location 9EE999H) following each vertical reset. Three bytes of control
data are located at the end of each line of characters. The first byte,
called the terminator, is FF hex and is a unique character that the video
processor recognizes as the end of the line.
The next two bytes form an
address (low byte followed by high byte) which points to the first
character of the next 1 ine to be displayed.
The byte of attr ibutes that
corresponds to the low byte of the address contains three bits of line
attributes which are applied to the line being pointed to.
Attribute
RAM

Attribute Data

No Attribute

Character
RAM

Character Data

Terminator

The bits are assi g ned in the

Line Attribute No Attribute
Address of Next Line

ollowing manner:

Unused

Not
under
Line

Not
Blink

Not
Bold

Rev.
Video

Double
Height

Scroll
Region

Char.
Attrib.
Char.
Data

Alt.
Char
Set

Line
Attrib.

Unused

Code for Character

Unused

unused

Double
Width

PC1SS-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

page 13

(Smooth) scroll region - if set, this line scrolls; if not set, it
doesn't.
Double
Height

Double
width

0
0
1
1

0
1

Result
bottom half double height
top half double height
double width
normal height, normal width

3.1.3.9.4 DCS11 programming Information - The DC011 video-timing chip can
be accessed by the 8088 (WRITE-ONLY) at I/O address 4. The DC011 must be
programmed with the desired refresh rate and col mnn mode on power-up and
after any mode changes. To program the DC011, wr i te two of the following
four codes:
Code

configuration

00
10

80 colmnn mode sets
132 colmnn mode interlaced mode
60 Hz mode resets
50 Hz mode interlaced mode

.20

Interlaced/non-interlaced mode is determined by the order in which 80/132
col mnn and 50/60 Hz are set.
Every time the DC011 is programmed, its
internal timing chain is reset.
Since this causes the screen to jmnp, the
DC0l1 should be programmed only if absolutely necessary. For example, the
following two instructions set the DC011 to 80-column, 60 Hz, no interlace:
MOV AX,2000H
OUT DC011,AX
Note
When 80 colmnn mode is selected, the
video processor is actually capable of
displaying 83 colmnns in single width
mode or 41 colmnns in double width/height
mode.
When 132-colmnn mode is selected,
137 colmnns can be displayed in single
width mode or 68 columns in double
width/height mode.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 14

3.1.3.9.5 DC912 programming Information - The OC012 video control chip can
be accessed by the 8088 (WRITE-ONLY) at I/O address 0CH.
The following
codes are defined for the DC012:
Code

Result

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
98
09
0A
0B
0C
00

Set scroll latch LSB's to 00
Set scroll latch LSB's to 91
Set scroll latch LSB's to 10
Set scroll latch LSB's to 11
Set scroll latch MSB's to 00
S~t scroll latch MSB's to 01
Set scroll latch MSB's to 10
Set scroll latch MSB's to 11
Toggle blink flip flop
Clear vertical frequency interrupt
Set reverse field on
Set reverse field off
Not supported
Set basic attribute to reverse video with 24 lines and set
blink flip flop off
No t suppo r ted
Set basic attribute to reverse video w/48 lines and set blink
flip flop off

0E
0F

On power-up, the DC0l2 can be programmed to bring it to a known state.
Typically, codes 00, 94, 99, 0B, and 00 will be programmed at power-up
time.
The value to which the scroll latch is set determines which scan row the
first line of a scrolling region starts on.
Likewise, it determines the
last scan row displayed for the last line in a scrolling region.
For example, when the latch is set to zero (the degenerate case), the first
line of the scroll region starts at scan row zero (so the line is
completely visible).
The last line of the scrolling region terminates at
scan row 9 (so this line is also completely visible) •
When the scroll latch is non-zero, for example 5, the first line of the
scrolling region starts with scan row 5 (so only the bottom half of the
line is visible). The last line of the scrolling region terminates at scan
row 4 (so only the top half of the line is visible) •
If the scroll latch is incremented from 0 through 9 and back to 0 again
once each frame, the screen appears to smooth scroll from bottom to top
(assuming that line linkages and line attributes are properly handled).
On
the other hand, if the scroll latch is decremented from 0 to 9 then down
through 0, the screen appears to smooth scroll from top to bottom (again
assuming that all line linkages and line attributes are properly handled) •
A scrolling region is defined as a group of lines with their scrolling
attributes set, surrounded by lines whose scrolling attribute is not set.
Note that the scrolling attribute for a line resides in the line pointer
information at the end of the previous line • • Also, the first line on the
screen (the one at RAM location 0), has its scrolling attribute reset by
definition. Also note that the definition of a scrolling region does not
preclude the definition of more than one scrolling region per screen,
although that is of dubious value.

PCI00-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 15

Whenever the scroll latch is non-zero, each scrolling region on the screen
requires an extra (scrolling) line to be linked in.
For example, if the
scrolling region is l~ lines long, when the scroll latch is set non-zero
there will have to be an eleventh line linked in. If scrolling up
(incrementing the scroll latch), the line must be linked in at the bottom.
When the scroll latch is incremented back to 0 again, the top line of the
scrolling region must be unlinked. When scrolling down (decrementing the
scroll latch), new lines must be linked in at the top of the scroll region
and unlinked down at the bottom. All line linking/unlinking should be done
during the vertical blanking interval (after the vertical frequency
interrupt is rung). In 60-Hz mode, there are two blanked lines at the
beginning of the screen (the line at RAM location 0, and the line that it
points to) .
The first line (at location 0) is guaranteed to have been read by the time
that the interrupt service routine is entered; any changes to this line
will not affect the screen until the next frame time.
However, the second
line will not be read for over 500 microseconds after
asserting the interrupt.
If it is to be changed, it must be changed very soon after entering the
interrupt service routine in order to guarantee that the change will be
visible in the current frame.
Therefore, if the first visible line on the screen is involved in the
scroll region and is being either linked in or unlinked, then the vertical
interrupt routine must guarantee that its pointer (which resides in the
second invisible line) is changed within approximately 500 usec after the
ringing of the interrupt.
The modification of the scroll latch is much less time critical than this.
Because the scroll latch is loaded by the DC012 by the vertical reset at
the beginning of each frame, the only requirement is that the scroll latch
be modified before the next frame begins.
Note that the scroll latch value
is the value that will be used during the next frame rather than the
current frame.
3.1.3.10 Keyboard Interface - The interface to the keyboard is a RS423
full-duplex connection. The interface runs at 4800 bits per second
asynchronous, with an 8-bit no parity character format. The UART used on
the mother board is an 825lA. It must be set up in asynchronous mode with a
16 times clock and 8-bits no parity.
The 825lA contains a write-only
command register that is used to configure the operating mode of the UART.
The first byte written to the command register after a hard or soft reset
of the UART is interpreted as a Mode Instruction.
For the asynchronous
mode of operation, all successive bytes written to the command register are
interpreted as Command Instructions.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 16

The Mode Instruction write Format of the 8215A (output to port 11 hex)
as follows:
(shown for asynchronous mode)

07
06
00 - Invalid
01 - 1
Stop
10 = 1.5
Bits
11 = 2

0 - Odd 0 - No
Parity
Parity
1 = Even 1 =
Parity
Parity

02
03
00 - 5 BIt Char.
01 = 6 Bit Char.
10 = 7 Bit Char.
11 = 8 Bit Char.

00 - Synchronous
IX Clock
01
10 = 16X Clock
11 = 64X Clock

The Command Instruction Write Format of the 8215A (output to port 11 hex)
is as follows:
(shown for asynchronous mode)

1 - Soft 1 - RTS
Reset
Ac tive

Not
Used

1 Error
Reset

03
02
1 - Send 1 Forced
Enable
break
Recv'r

1 = DTR
Active

1 =
Enable
Xmi t' r

DTR (Data Terminal Ready) - This output is normally used to signal the
DCE (Data Communication Equipment) that the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)
is ready to communicate.
In the PC100-B, DTR is used as a general
purpose, latched output. When DTR Lis active low ( a "1" in the UART
command register), the hardware interrupt vectors appear in their normal
locations. When DTR L is inactive high, the vectors are relocated,
as defined in section 3.1.3.8.
The recommended setup procedure is to output the following sequence to port
11 (hex):
(all values in hex)
0,0,0,40,4E,17
DURING THE INITIALIZATION, CONSECUTIVE WRITES MUST NOT BE SPACED
ANY CLOSER THAN 3 MICROSECONDS.
The Status Read Format of the 8251A (input from Port 11 Hex)

I
I

DSR

( SYNDET/
BRKDET

05
FE

follows:

TxEMPTY

RxRDY

TxRDY

Note 1
SAME DEFINITIONS AS I/O PINS
PARITY ERROR - The PE flag is set when a parity error is detected.
It is
reset by the ER bit of the Command Instruction. PE does not inhibit
operation of the 8251A.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 17

OVERRUN ERROR - The OE flag is set when the CPU does not read a character
before the next one becomes available. It is reset by the ER bit of the
Command Instruction. OE does not inhibit operation of the 8251A, however,
the previously overrun character is lost.
FRAMING ERROR (Async only) - The FE flag is set when a valid Stop bit is
not detected at the end of every character. It is reset by the ER bit of
the Command Instruction. FE does not inhibit the operation of the 8251A.
A framing error will be generated when the keyboard cable is not properly
connected, or if certain hardware malfunctions occur in the keyboard.
DATA SET READY - Indicates that the DSR is at a zero level.
Used to read a
manufacturing jumper. TxRDY status bit has different meanings from the
TxRDY output pin. The former is not conditioned by -CTS and TxENi the
latter is conditioned by both -CTS and TxEN. i.e., TxRDY status bit = DB
Buffer Empty TxRDY pin out = DB Buffer Empty (-CTS=0) (TxEN=l)
Note 2
TxE (Transmitter Empty) - When the 8251A has no characters to send, the
TxEMPTY output will go "high".
It resets upon receiving a character from
the CPU if the transmitter is enabled. TxEMPTY remains low when the
transmitter is disabled if it is actually empty.
RxRDY (Receiver Ready) - This output indicates that the 8251A contains a
character that is ready to be input to the CPU. RxRDY is connected to the
interrupt structure of the CPU. For polled operation, the CPU can check the
condition of RxRDY using a Status Read operation.
RxEnable, when off, holds RxRDY in the Reset Condition.
For Asynchronous
mode, to set RxRDY, the Receiver must be enabled to sense a Start Bit and a
complete character must be assembled and transferred to the Data Output
Reg ister.
Failure to read the received character from the Rx Data Output Register
prior to the assembly of the next Rx Data character will set overrun
condition error and the previous character will be written over and lost.
If the Rx Data is being read by the CPU when the internal transfer is
occurring, overrun error will be set and the old character will be lost.
TxRDY (Transmitter Ready) - This output signalS the CPU that the
transmitter is ready to accept a data character. The TxRDY output pin is
used as an interrupt to the system, since it is masked by TxEnable. For
Polled operation, the CPU can check TxRDY using a Status Read operation.
TxRDY is automatically reset by the leading edge of -WR when a data
character is loaded from the CPU.
Note that when using the Polled operation, the TxRDY status bit is not
masked by TxEnable, but will only indicate the Empty/Full Status of
the Tx Data Input Register.
Parity errors should not occur. A hardware or software problem exists
if parity errors do occur.
The keyboard generates an interrupt to the 8088
when either the TxRDY pin or the RxRDY pin is asserted. The interrupt is a
type 26 Hex.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 18

3.1.3.11 printer Port Interface - This is a general purpose printer port
which provides an RS423 interface compatible with DEC printers. EIA
signals supported are:
o
o
o
o

Transmit Data
Recei ve Da ta
Data Terminal Ready
Data Set Ready asserted

Software programmable bit rates supported are:
1290
2400
4899
961iJ0

75
150
390
600

printer bit rates are selected by writing the following to 8088 port IiJEH:
Data Bit 9-2
IiJ

Bit Rate
75
159
300
600
1200
2400
481iJ1iJ
9600

1
2
3

4
5
6

Note
Bi t 3 controls the communications port clock
as follows:
Source
Internal
External

Value of Bit 3

The Printer Port is programmed to use a l6X baud rate clock input.
Software-programmable character formats supported are 5-8 bits/character
with 1, 1-1/2, or 2 stop bits/character.
Parity may be selected as odd,
even, or none.
Software should support XON/XOFF restraint protocol, and
DTR restraint protocol for this port.
The D-type 25-pin female EIA printer
connector physically resides on the mother board in the normal printer port
location and attaches directly to a printer.
DSR and CTS are always
asserted.
3.1.4 MPSC OVerview
The 72liJl Multi-protocol Serial Controller is a microcomputer peripheral
device that supports Asynchronous (Start/Stop), Byte Synchronous (Monosync,
IBM Bisync), and Bit Synchronous (ISO's HDLC, IBM's SDLC) protocols. This
controller's flexible architecture allows implementation of many variations
of these three protocols with low software and hardware overhead.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 19

The Multi-Protocol Serial Controller (MPSC) implements two independent
serial receiver/transmitter channels. The printer port uses one channel
and the communications port uses the other channel.
As implemented on the mother board, the MPSC supports two microprocessor
interface options: Polled and Interrupt.

3.1.4.1 Asynchronous Operations,
asynchronous mode, the MPSC must
information:
o
o
o
o
o
o

General
Fo r operation in the
be initialized with the following

character length (WR3; D7, D6 and WR5; D6, D5)
clock rate (WR4; D7, D6)
number of stop bits (WR4; D3; D2)
odd, even or no parity (WR4; Dl, D0)
interrupt mode (WRl, WR2)
receivero(WR3; D0) or transmitter (WR5; D3) enable

When loading these parameters into the MPSC, WR4 information must be
written before the WRl, WR3, WR5 parameters/commands.
For transmission via a modem or RS423 interface, the Request To Send (RTS)
(WR5; D1) and Data Terminal Ready (DTR) (WR5i D7) bits must be set along
with the Transmit Enable bit (WR5; D3). setting the Auto Enables (WR3; D5)
bit allows the programmer to send the first character of the message
without waiting for a clear to send (CTS).
Both the Framing Error and Receive Overrun Error flags are latched and
cause an interrupt.
If the External/Status Interrupt bit (WR1; D0) is enabled, Break Detect
(RR0; D7) and Carrier Detect (RR0; D3) will cause an interrupt.
Reset
External/Status Interrupts (WR0; D5, D4, D3) will clear Break Detect and
Carrier Detect bits if they are set.
A status read after a data read will include error status for the next word
in the buffer. If the Interrupt on First Character (WRl; D4, D3) is
selected, then data and error status are held until an Error Reset command
(WR0; D5, D4, D3) is given.
If the Interrupt on Every Character Mode bit (WRl; D4, D3) is selected,
the interrupt vector is different if there is an error status in RRl. When
the character is read, the error status bit is set and the Special Receive
Condition vector is returned if Status Affects vector (WRIB; D2) is
selected.
In a polled environment, the Receive Character Available bit (RR0; D0) must
be monitored so that the CPU can determine when data is available. The bit
is reset automatically when the data is read.
If the Xl clock mode is
selected, the bit synchroni zation must be accomplished externally.
Refer
to Figure 3.

PC10'0'-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 20'

D0'

5 B/CHAR
7 B/CHAR
6 B/CHAR
8 B/CHAR

AUTO
ENABLES

RX
ENABLE

-------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------WR3
--------

0'13
0'1
10
11

RX
RX
RX
RX

--------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------

00 Xl CLOCK

WR4

0'1 X16 CLOCK
10' X32 CLOCK
11 X64 CLOCK

WRS

DTR
Note 1

00' TX 5
0'1 TX 7
10' TX 6
11 TX 8
Figure 3.

bjCHAR
b/CHAR
b/CHAR
b/CHAR

SEND
BREAK

130 ENABLE SYNC
MODES
0'1 1 STOP BIT
10 1.5 STOP BIT
11 2 STOP BITS

EVEN/
ODD
PARITY

TX
ENABLE

RTS
Note 1

PARITY
ENABLE

Asynchronous Mode Register Setup
Note 1

These bits in MPSC register WRS not used.
Refer
to
subhead
3.1.4.5.1
Communications Control Register.
3.1.4.2 Communications Port - This port is used to communicate to another
computer.
It has full modem support and supports the same signals as the
VTl0'2. U.S. and European full- and half-duplex modems can be supported by
this port. The port has ASYNC as well as BISYNC modes with a RS423
(V.24/V.28) physical interface conforming to CCITT V.21, V.22 and V.23.
Break detection by this port is supported.
50'
75
110'
l3 4.5
150'
20'0'
30'0'
60'0

1200'
1800
20'00
2400'
3600
480'0'
960'13
1920'0

Bit rates supported are:

PC1SS-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 21

Communications bit rates are selected by writing the following to 8088 port
06H:
Nibble Data
0 H
1 H
2 H
3 H
4 H
5 H
6 H
7 H
8 H
9 H
A H
B H
C H
D H
E H
F H

Bit Rate
50
75
110
134.5
150
200
300
600
1200
1800
2000
2400
3600
4800
9600
19200

Percent Error

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
+.14
o
o
-.17
+.46
+.46
+.46
-2.04

The low nibble of the data written to port 06H sets the transmit clock
while the high nibble sets the receive clock. The Communications Port
is programmed to use a 16X baud rate clock input.
For example: Data 0AH written to 8088 port 06H would set the receive bit
rate to 50 and the transmit bit rate to 2000.
Bit 3 on port 0EH selects the comm port clocks (RxC, TxC).
set; internal when reset.

External .when

Note
Bit 0-2 on port 0EH controls the printer port
bit rates.
All bit rates are software selectable. Transmit and receive bit rates may
be selected independently from the available bit rates.
The ROM code
supports VT102 emulation on this port.
Signals supported are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

Receive Data
Transmit Data
Secondary Transmit Data
Request to Send
Secondary Request to Send
Clear to Send
Secondary Clear to Send
Receive Line Signal Detect
Secondary Receive Line Signal Detect/Speed Indicator (Bell 212A)
Ring Indicator
Data Set Ready
Speed Select

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 22

3.1.4.3 Synchronous Operation - Mono Sync, Bi Sync, General - The MPSC must
be initialized with the following parameters:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Odd or even parity (WR4i 01, 00)
Xl clock mode (WR4i 07, 06)
8- or 16-bit sync character (WR4i OS, 04)
CRC polynomial (WR5i 02)
Transmitter Enable (WR5i 03)
Interrupt modes (WRl, WR2)
Transmit character length (WR5i 06, 05)
Receive character length (WR3i 07, 06

WR4 parameters must be written before WRl, WR3, WR5, WR6 and WR7.
The data
is transmitted on the falling edge of the Transmit Clock (TxC) and is
received on the rising edge of Receive Clock (RxC). The Xl clock is used
for both transmit and receive operations for all three sync modes: Mono, Bi
and Ex ternal •

-------WR3

-------WR4

------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------04
02
00
03
01
------- ------- ------- ------- -------

07
06
05
-------1------------- ------- -------

00 RX 5 B/CHAR
01 RX 7 B/CHAR
10 RX 6 B/CHAR
11 RX 8 B/CHAR

AUTO
ENABLES

ENTER
HUNT
MOOE

------------00 8 BIT SYNC
-------1------o
0
01 16 BIT SYNC

RX CRC
ENABLE

SYNC
CHAR
LOAO
INHIBIT

RX
ENABLE

------- ------- ------- ------EVEN/
000
PARITY

PARITY
ENABLE

1
TX
(SELECT
RTS
ENABLE CRC-16) Note 1

TX CRC
ENABLE

-------- ------- ------- I------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------11 EXT SYNC

WR5

OTR
Note 1

Figure 4.

013 TX 5 b/CHAR
131 TX 7 b/CHAR
10 TX 6 b/CHAR
11 TX B b/CHAR

SENO
BREAK

Synchronous Mode Register Setup -- Monosync, Bisync
Note 1

These bits in MPSC register WR5 not used.
Refer
to
subhead
3--:-1.4.5.1
Communications Control Register.
3.1.4.4 Synchronous Operation, SOLC, General - Like the other synchronous
operations, the SOLC mode must be initialized with the following
parameters:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

SOLC mode (WR4i OS, 04)
SOLC polynomial (WR5i 02)
Request to Send, Oata Terminal Ready, transmit character length
(WR5i 06, 05)
Interrupt modes (WRli WR2)
Transmit enable (WR5i 03)
Receive enable (WR3i 00)
Auto enable (WR3i 05)
External/status interrupt (WRli 013)

Page 23

27-Feb-1984

PC100-B Specification

WR4 parameters must be written before WRl, WR3, WRS, WR6 and WR7.

------- -------

D7
D6
DS
D4
D3
D2
-------1-------------1------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------WR3

00 RX 5 B/CHAR
01 RX 7 B/CHAR
10 RX 6 b/CHAR
11 RX 8 b/CHAR

-------1------WR4

-------- ------WRS

DTR
Note 1

AUTO
ENABLES

ENTER
HUNT
MODE

(SELECTS SDLC/
HDLC MODE)
------- ------- ------00 TX< 6b/CHAR
0
01 TX 7 b/CHAR
10 TX 6 b/CHAR
11 TX 8 b/CHAR

RX CRC
ENABLE

ADDRESS
SEARCH
MODE

D0
RX
ENABLE

------- ------- ------- ------0
TX
(SELECT
RTS
ENABLE SDLC
Note 1
CRC)

TX CRC
ENABLE

--------1------- --------------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------Figure 5.

Synchronous Mode Register Setup -- SOLC/HOLC
Note 1

These bits in MPSC register WRS not used.
Refer to subhead 3.1. 4. 5.1 Communication
Control Register.
3.1.4.5 Modem Control Lines
Several modem control signals are not
implemented using the 7201 Multi-Protocol Serial Controller chip.
These
signals are implemented with the Communications Control Register and The
Communications Status Register.
3.1.4.5.1 Communications Control Register
The communications control
register is an 8-bit write only register that controls the modem lines on
the communications port. It also controls diagnostic error codes displayed
by the four 8088 LEDs.
This register is accessed by performing a write to
address 02H.
The register bit format is shown in Figure 6 and the bits are
described in Table 1.
7

I I

ADDRESS 02H (WO)
COMM
SEL H
1- COMM SPD
SRTS H
COMM DTR L
COMM RTS
LED D6 (LSB)
LED D3
LED D4
LED DS (MSB)

Figure 6. Communications Control Register (8088) Format

PCI00-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 24

Table 1. Communications Control Register (8088) Bit Description
Bit

Name
COMM SPD SEL H

Description
This bit controls the Speed Select line of the
communications port.

COMM SRTS H

This bit controls the Secondary Request To Send
line of the communications port.

COMM DRT L

This bit controls the Data Terminal Ready line
of the communications port.

COMM RTS

This bit controls the Request To Send line of
the communications port.

LED (D6)

This bit displays the least significant bit
of the diagnostic error message code. When
written with a 0, the LED lights.

LED (D3)

This bit displays the second bit of the
diagnostic error message code. When
written with a 0, the LED lights.

LED (D4)

This bit displays the third bit of the
diagnostic error message code. When
written with a 0, the LED lights.

LED (D 5)

This bit displays the most significant bit
of the diagnostic error message code. When
written with a 0, the LED lights.

3.1.4.5.2 Communications Status Register - The Communications status
Register is an 8-bit read only register that holds the status of the modem
control lines for the communications port.
It also serves as a status
register for the special interprocessor interrupt lines and the status of
the hardware failure detect enable signal.
This register is accessed by
performing a read to address 02H.
The register bit format is shown in
Figure 7 and the bits are described in Table 2.
7

I I

ADDRESS 02 H (RO)

1- COMM RI

______ COMM SI/SCF
__________ COMM DSR
COMM CTS
COMM RLSD
---------------- HDWRE FAILURE DETECT ENABL
INT 88 L
INT Z80 L
Figure 7. Communications Status Register (8088 Format)

PClgg-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 25

Table 2. Communications Status Register (8gSS) Bit Description
Blt

Name
COMM RI

Descrlptlon
This bit reflects the status of the Ring Indicator
line of the communications port.

COMM SI/SCF

This bit reflects the status of the Speed Ondicator
line or the Secondary Receive Line Signal Detect
of the communications port.

COMM DSR

This bit reflects the status of the Data Set Ready
line of the communications port.

COMM CTS

This bit reflects the status of the Clear To Send
line of the communications port.

COMM RLSD

This bit reflects the status of the Feceive Line
Signal Detect of the communications port.

HFD ENB L

This bit reflects the status of Hardware Failure
Detect Enable L.

INT 88 L

This bit reflects the status of the INT 88 L bit
that is asserted by the Z813A to interrupt the
81388, for interprocessor communications.

INT Z813 L

This bit reflects the status of the
INT Z813A L bit that is asserted by the 81388 to
interrupt the Z813A for interprocessor
communications.

3.1.5

ZSgA System

The following describes the section of the system controlled directly by
the Z813A.
3.1.5.1 ZSgA CPU - The module includes one Z80A microprocessor, which runs
from a clock of 4.1312 MHz. The Z813A alone has access to the floppy disk
interface and thus is responsible for controlling the floppy (via
programmed I/O) for all applications.
3.1.5.2 Z8gA Shared Memory - The Z813A has available to it a 64KB RAM that
is divided into 62KB shared and 2KB unshared memory. Accesses to the shared
portion of memory select the corresponding address in the standard bank of
64KB RAMS.
Accesses to the unshared memory select a private 2K x 8
byte-wide
static RAM.
If the shared RAM is "busy" at the time of a Z80A access, the Z813A will
execute wait states until the RAM is free.
The RAM is considered "busy"
when an 81388 cycle or a refresh cycle is in progress or is pending.
In addition to wait cycles due to contention, all Ml cycles from the shared
RAM have one extra wait cycle due to the timing for this sort of machine
cycle.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1.984

Page 26

In any case, the Z80A is held in a wait state for no longer than
approximately two microseconds.
If both processors are executing out of
the shared memory, the Z80A cannot reliably access the floppy disk (for
example, lost data errors will often result) •
3.1.5.3 Z80A Private RAM -.The 2 KB of unshared RAM may be accessed by the
Z80A at any time without any wait states.
3.1.5.4 Z80A I/O Map - The following is the Z80A I/O map.
PORT

FUNCTION

00H
00H
20H
21H
2lH
40H
40H
60H
60H
6lH
62H
63H

Clear Interrupt to Z80A (Read)
Interrupts 8088 (Write)
set ZFLIP
Disk Diagnostic Read Register
Disk Diagnostic write Register
Disk Control Read Register
Disk Control Write Register
FDC Status Register
FDC Control Register
FOC Track Register
FDC sector Register
FDC Data Register
Note

RO
WO
Wo (See Note)
RO
WO (See Note)
RO
WO
RO
WO
R/W
R/W
R/W

The above Z80A I/O ports have a great
number of alias addresses throughout the
Z80A's 256 I/O port address space.
Prudent programming practice precludes
using any Z80A I/O port address that is
not defined above.
writing Diagnostic Write Register at
address 2lH will reset ZFLIP. Writing the
Diagnostic write Register at address 20H
will set ZFLIP. Inadvertent use of these
registers will likely cause program
problems.
3.1.5.5 Z80A Memory Map - The Z80A memory map is shown in Figure 8.

PC100-B Specification

Page 27

27-Feb-1984

Z FLIPPED

Z NOT FLIPPED

FFFF

7FFF FFFF

SHARED RAM

8000

FFFF

800
PRIVATE
8088

8800

800

8000

PRIVATE
Z80

800
PRIVATE

PRIVATE

8088

Z80

Figure 8. Z80A Memory Map
3.1.5.6 Z80A Cycle Time - The clock time on theZ80A is approximately 250
ns. Unshared memory accesses have no wait states. Shared memory accesses
have wait states on Ml cycles and for cycles in which there is contention
between devices accessing the shared RAM. Contention exists because of
refresh cycles and 8088 cycles.
3.1.5.7 Z80A Interrupts - The only interrupts are interprocessor interrupts
from the 8088 CPU.
The vector placed on the bus is F7 (hex) which causes a
RST 30 instruction to be executed in interrupt mode 0.
3.1.5.8 Floppy Controller Module - The floppy controller module is not
optional. It is a separate module that connects to the mother board via
J7.
The interface is designed to control up to four 5-1/4 inch platters
with one or two surfaces. The controller supports soft-sectored
double-density diskettes using a PLL circuit. Single- or double-sided
drives are supported. The interface adheres to drive capability and signal
definition of the ANSI standard interface for mini-floppy drives.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb...,1984

Page 28

The floppy controller block diagram is shown in Figure 9.

CPU CONTROL------------------------>

F
L

---------->1 SEPARATOR
DATA
1---->

P
P
Y

FLOPPY
DATA

!- I
A

DIAGNOSTIC
LOOPBACK
DATA

>/ SHAPER
PULSE
-

Z813 DATA BUS

T
R

-->1 PRECOMP
WRITE

---->

CONTROL SIGNALS

-------->-+------->

L
E
R

----<------>---+------1
+-<--

STATUS

-------<--------------------

DIAGNOSTICS
BUFFER

+->--

CONTROL
LATCH
AND DRIVE
SELECT

F
L

o
P
P
Y

5
13
D

<----+1

D
R
I
V
E
R

K
D
R

I
V
E

------------->

+-<--I----~_~_~-~_~_~_--I<----------------------I--Figure 9.

Floppy Controller Block Diagram

3.1.5.8.1 F1pppyDisk Controller Registers: .Z89A.
1.

Command Register (Write Only)

(Port Address 69 Hex)

This 8-bit write-only register is loaded by the program with the
command that is to be executed by the drive. A command summary
follows:
.

PC199-B Specification

Page 29

27-Feb-1984
Table 3. Command Summary

Type

Command

Restore
Seek
Step
Step In
Step Out
Read Sector
Wr i te Sector
Read Address
Force
In terrupt

I
I
I
I
I
II
II

III
IV

9
9
0
9
9
1
1
1
1

9
9
fa

1
1
9
9
1
1

9
9
1
9
1
9
1
9
9

Blts
9

9
1
u
u
u
m
m
9
1

h
h
h
h
h
9
9
9
I (3)

v
v
v
v
v
e
e
e
I (2)

r (1)
r(l)
r (1)
r(l)
r (1)
9
0
9
I (1)

r(9)
r(9)
r(0)
r(0)
r(9)
9
a(9)
fa

I (0)

Note
Read Track
supported.

and

write

Track

are

not

Flag Summary
Type I Commands
Head Load Flag (Bit 3)
h
v
Verify Flag (Bit 2)
rl,r9
Stepping Motor Rate (Bits
u = Update Flag (Bit 4)

1~9)

Type II and III Commands
Multiple Record Flag (Bit 4)
m
a9 = Data Address Mark (Bit 9)
e = 39 msec delay
Type IV commands
Ii = Interrupt Condition Flags
For more detailed information on the meaning and purpose of these bits,
refer to the System Module Functional Specification.
Floppy Command Summary
This module accepts nine commands for floppy disk control. See Table 3 for
a comma.nd summary.
Commands should only be loaded into the command
register when the Busy status bit is off.
The one exception is the Force
Interrupt command. The Busy status bit is set when a command is executed.
Type I Commands
Type I commands are for head posi tioning.
The stepping
commands are dictated by the dr ive.
Rl = 0 and R9 = 9
recommended stepping rate for the RXS9 drive.

rate of these
(6 ms) is the

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-l984

Page 30

The head load flag determines if the head is loaded at the beginning of the
command. Otherwise, the head is loaded at the end of a command.
The verification flag allows a verification operation to take place on the
destination track.
The verification consists of reading the first
encountered 10 field off of the disk.
The track address of the 10 field is compared to the Track Register.
If
there is a match and a valid ID CRC, the verification is complete.
If not
valid, the Seek error status bit in the FDC is set.
The Step, Stepin, and Stepout commands contain an update flag for updating
the track register when this bit is set after the step has been completed.
Type II Commands
The Type II commands are to read and write sectors to the disk.
Prior to
loading the Type II command into the Command register, the Sector register
must be loaded with the desired sector number.
Upon receipt of the command, the Busy status bit is set.
If the e flag is
set (normal case), the head is loaded and the HLT signal is sampled after
30 mSi otherwise, no delay is incurred after a command.
The HLT does not become active until 500 ms after the head is loaded to
allow the spindle motor to have time to accelerate.
The FOC then attempts
to find the 10 field with the specified track and sector.
If the desired field is not found within five revolutions of the disk, the
Record Not Found status bit is set. Otherwise, the command is executed by
the FOC generating Data Requests (DRQS) for servicing the data register.
Each of the Type II commands contain an m flag which determines if multiple
sectors are to be read or written, depending on the command. When set,
multiple sectors are read or written with the sector register internally
updated for address verification on the next track.
The FOC continues to do the transfers until the sector register exceeds the
number of sectors on the track or until a force interrupt command is loaded
into the command register.
Note
If the command is not terminated by
software, the 1793 continues looking for
five index pulses after the last sector
on the disk has been read or written.
If the Sector register exceeds the number of sectors on the track, the
Record Not Found ISTER EXCEEDS THE NUMBER OF SECTORS ON THE TRACK, THE
Record Not Found Status bit is set. When the head is loaded, the Busy
status bit is set, and when an ID field is encountered that has the correct
track, sector, side numbers and correct CRC, the data field is presented to
the computer (read) or presented by the computer (write).

PCI00-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 31

At the end of the Read operation, the type of Data Address Mark encountered
is recorded in the Status register (Bit 5). Ona Write operation, the a0
flag (Bit 0) determines the type of Data Address Mark to be written onto
the disk. If set, a deleted data mark is written else a data mark is
wri tten.
Type III Commands
The Read Address command is to read in the six bytes of the ID field (track
number, side number, sector address, sector length, and two bytes of CRC).
Type IV Command
This command is to terminate an operation upon the specified condition in
Bits 3-0. See Table 1, Command Summary, for descriptions of the termination
conditions.
Type I Command Bit Description
1.

Bit 0,1 - Stepping Rate Bits - These bits control the rate at which
the stepping pulses are sent to the drive. Check the specifications
for the drive in use to determine the drive's proper step rate. See
the table above for stepping rate breakdown.
Bit 2 - Track verify Bit - This bit determines if there is a
veri fication operation to take place on the destination track.
Dur ing ver ification, the head is loaded and after a 30-ms delay,
the HLT input is sampled.
After a 500-ms motor start up time, the
HLT input becomes active. When HLT is true, the first ID field is
read off the disk. The track address of the ID field is compared to
the track reg ister. If there is a match and a val id ID CRC, the
verification is complete and an interrupt is generated.
If not
valid, the seek error status is set.

Bit 3 - Head Load Flag - This bit determines if the head is to be
loaded at the beg inning of a command.
If the head is loaded then
the head remains loaded until
either
the FDC receives a command
that specifically disengages the head or 15 revolutions of the disk
have passed with the busy bit = 0.

Bit 4 - Update Bit (Step Commands) - When set, the track register
is updated by one for each step; otherwise the track register is
not affected.

Bits 5-7 - Determine the command to be executed.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 32

Type II Commands Bit Description
1.

Bit 9 - Data Address Mark Bit - When set upon a write sector
command, this bit defines a Data Mark (13FBH) to be written on the
disk.
If the bit is not set then a Deleted Data Mark (13F8H) is
wri tten onto the disk.
When writing valid data on the disk this
bit should be set.

Bit 1 - Al ways 13.

Bit 2 - 313 Millisecond Delay Bit - When set during a command, there
is a 313-ms delay before reading begins.
For maximum controller
throughput, this bit should be 13.
I t should be set if the last
command was a seek or new drive select.

Bit 3 - Always 13.

Bit 4 - Mul tiple sector Bi t
sectors to be transferred.

Bits 5-7 - Determine the command to be executed.

- When set, this bit allows mul tiple

Type II I Command Bit Description
1.

Bits 9,1 - Always set to 13.

Bit 2 - Same as Bit 2 for Type II commands.

Bits 3-7 - Determine the command to be executed.

Type IV Command Bit Description
This command can be loaded into the register at any time.
If there is a
current command under execution, the command is terminated. See Table 3 for
a description of conditions upon which the command is terminated.
2.

Status Register (Read Only)

(Port Address 613 Hex)

This read only register also resides at the same address as the command
register.
It contains the a-bit status resulting from the completion of a
command. A description of the status bits follows.
Type I Status Bit Description
7

I 1-

Busy
_ _ _ Index
Track 13
ID Field CRC Error
Seek Error
-------------------- Head Loaded
Write Protect
--------------------------- Not Ready

PC100-B Specification

Page 33

27-Feb-1984

Bit 0 - Busy Bit - When this bit is true (1), the FOC is currently
executing a command. Only a Type IV command can be issued when this
condition exists.

Bit 1 - Index Bit - When this bit is true
currently occurring.

Bit 2 - Track 0 Bit - When this bit is true
head is currently positioned at track 0.

Bit 3 - 10 Field CRC Error Bit - When true, this means that there
was a CRC error of the ID field.

Bit 4 - Seek Error Bit - When true, a seek error was encountered
meaning that the destination track address was not found.

Bit 5 - Head Loaded Bit - This bit reflects the current status of
the head. When set, the head is loaded and the HLT input is
asserted.

Bit 6 - Wr i te Protect Bi t - When set, the bit means that the
current disk is write protected.
An attempt to write a sector
generates an interrupt if the device interrupt enable bit is set.

Bit 7 - Not Ready Bit - When set, the bit indicates that the drive
is not ready. This could mean that the drive is not up to speed,
the disk is in upside down, or the door is open.
This bit must be
clear before any commands are issued to the FOC.

(1), the index pulse is
(1),

the

read/write

Type II Read Sector Status Bit Description
7

210

I I 1-~____

Busy
Data Request
Lost Data
ID/Data Field CRC Error
Record Not Found Error
Record Type

Not Ready
1.

Bit 9 - Busy Bit - Same as Type I status.

Bit 1 - Data Request Bit - This bit means that the data register is
full and it is waiting for the CPU to read the register.

Bit 2 - Lost Data Bit - When set, ~t means that the data register
had not been serviced within 27.0 microseconds and the data in the
data register is not valid.

Bit 3 -ID/Data Field CRC Error Bit - When set, an error is found
in one or more ID fields or the data field.
This bit is reset when
updated.

Bit 4 - Record Not Found Error Bit - When. equal to one, this bit
means that a Data Address Mark was not found within 43 bytes of the
last 'ID field CRC byte or it can indicate that the desired track,
sector or side was not found.

PC199~B

Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 34

Bit 5 - Record Type Bit - This bit reflects the type of Data Mark
that was encountered during the read. When set a Deleted Data Mark
was found. If clear, a Data Mark was encountered.

Bit 6 - Always set to 0.

Bit 7 - Not Ready Bit - Same as Type I Not Ready Status Bit.

Type II Write Sector Status Bit Description
7

0
Busy
1- Data
Request
Lost Data
CRC Error
Record Not Found Error
Wr ite Fault
write Protect
Not Ready

Bit 9 - Busy Bit - Same as Type I status Busy Bit.

Bit 1 - Data Request Bit - This bit means that the data register is
empty and i t is wai ting for the CPU to write the reg i ster •

Bit 2 - Lost Data Bit - When set, it means that the data register
had not been written within 23.0 microseconds and the data on the
disk is not valid (zero bytes are substituted for data lost) •

Bit 3 - CRC Error Bit - When set, this bit indicates an error in
one or more ID fields. This bit is reset when updated.

Bit 4 - Record Not Found Error Bit - When equal to one, this bit
indicates that the desired track, sector or side was not found.

Bit 5 - write Fault Bit - Not implemented; should always be 0.

Bit 6 - Write Protect Bit - When this bit is set after a write
command, then an attempt was made to write on a write protected
disk.

Bit 7 - Not Ready Bit - Same as Type I Not Ready Status Bit

Track Register (Port Address 61 Hex)

This R/W 8-bit register holds the updated address of the current read/write
head.
It is incremented by one every time the head is stepped toward the
spindle and decremented by one every time the head is stepped away from the
spindle. The contents of the register are compared with the recorded track
number in the ID field during disk read, write and verify operations.
4.

Sector Register (Port Address 62 Hex)

This read/write 8-bit register holds the address of the desired sector
posi tion. The contents of. the register are compared with the recorded
sector number in the ID field during disk read and write operations.

PC199-B Specification
5.

Page 35

27-Feb-1984

Data Register (Port Address 63 Hex)

For a seek operation, this 8-bit read/write register holds the desired
track position. During data transfers, this register is the data buffer
for the disk.

3.1.5.8.2 General Control and Status Register Bit Description: Z89A This a-bit register holds various control information for the drive as well
as the module. The lowest four bits are read/write while the upper four
bits are read only.

3.1.5.9 General Floppy Control Register: Z89A - The following write-only
register (Port Address 40 Hex) holds control lines used to select drives
and write delay pre-comp values for the floppies.
1.

Bits 9-1 - These bits control the selection of floppy drives.
The
binary values written to them (0 - 3) selects drive 0 through 3.
Only 1 drive can be selected at a given time.

Bit 2 - Diagnostic READY override bit - When set, this bit asserts
DRIVE READY to the 1793.

Bit 3 - This bit controls the MOTOR 0 ON bit. Turns on the motor on
in the first drive unit.

Bit 4 - This bit controls the MOTOR 1 ON bit. Turns on the motor on
in the second drive unit.

Bit 5 - This bit selects the SIDE of the disk to be accessed.
single-sided drives, this bit is always set to a 0 for side 0.

Bits 6-7 - These binary bits are used to control the write delay
pre-comp values. The following table lists the values for all
tracks:
(TG43)

PCl

PC9

TRACK

0
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1

o- 9

For

- 19
29
- 39
49
- 60
- 69

10
20 30
40 50
61
70 -

3.1.5.9.1 Drive Select Light Operation - The drive select logic is set up
so that none of the drives are enabled on power-up.
When a disk is
installed, the door is closed, the drive is selected and either HEAD LOAD
or MOTOR ON is asserted. Then the drive active indicator light illuminates,
the head loads, and the motor turns on.
Only one drive can be selected at
a time.

PCHJ/I-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 36

The drive motors, on the other hand, are not gated with any signals. Each
motor on signal can be activated independent of any other condition. The
software never turns on both motors simultaneously. It is necessary to
delay the start of the second selected motor for 500 ms after the start of
the first motor.
CAUTION
When both drive motors are off, a MOTOR
ON override must not be generated for the
unse1ected dr ive. Due to a hardware
idiosyncrasy, this causes both drive
motors to turn on simultaneously.
3.1 5.1/1 General Floppy Status Register: Z811A - The following read-only
reg ster (Port Address 40 Hex) holds the status of the RX50 drive lines
com ng from the 1793 FDC and going to the floppy drive.
1.

Bits /I-I - These bits read back the status of Bit 0 and 1 from the
general floppy control reg ister. They indicate which drives have
been selected.

Bit 2 - This bit reflects the status of the TRACK GREATER THAN 43
signal from the 1793 going to the floppy.

Bit 3 - This bit reflects the status of MOTOR ON 0 line at the
floppy connector. The signal, when read as 0, indicates that the
MOTOR ON 0 bit is set.

Bit 4 - This bit reflects the status of MOTOR ON 1 line at the
floppy connector.
The signal, when read as 0, indicates that the
MOTOR ON 1 bit is set.

Bit 5 - This bit reflects the status of the side select signal at
the floppy connector.

Bit 6 - This bit reflects the status of the INTERRUPT REQUEST
signal coming from the 1793. This is used to indicate that a status
bi t has changed.

Bit 7 - This bit reflects the status of the DATA REQUEST signal
from the 1793.
Used to indicate that the 1793 has read data to be
transferred or requires new write data.

PC1S0-B Specification

page 37

27-Feb-1984

3.1.S.1S.1 Floppy Disk Controller Required Delays - The following
describes required delays from one operation to the next operation:
Operation

Next Operation

Delays Required
(microseconds)

Write to Command Register Read Busy Bit (status bit 13)

write to Command Register Read Status Bits 1-7

Write to Any Register

Read from Different Reg ister

Write to Track, sector
or Same Register

Read from Data Register

write to Any Reg ister

Write to Another Register

Interrupt Request

Read Status Register

list

3.1.5.10.2 Floppy Disk Motor Speedup Detection - While writing to a sector
on a disk, the opening or closing of the OTHER DRIVE I S door will cause a
transient in the floppy spindle motor speed.
This transient can make any
sector being written at the time of the opening or closing to be not
readable in all situations.
The following procedure is recommended and is
implemented in the BIOS of CP/M-86/813:
Just pr ior to writing a sector upon the disk, the drive being written to is
de-selected. The other drive IN THE SAME RX513 disk assembly is then
selected and the condition of the Ready bit is sampled. The disk being
written to is then selected again, and the write operation is performed.
After the sector has been completed, the same operation is performed; the
disk drive being written to is de-selected and the sister drive is
selected. Ready is again sampled. If the condition of this bit had changed
from the previous sample taken, then the sector must be re-written.
3.1.5.lS.3 Floppy Controller Head Load Timer Activation - The Head Load
Timer can be fired only in the following circumstance: The Head Load Timer
must not be already timing. This means that neither MOTOR ON bits (M13, Ml)
are active, nor is the HEAD LOAD bi t (HLD). Upon the next occurence of any
of these three bits, and the state of the drive is READY, then the Head
Load Timer will be actuated. This timer puts a 51313-ms delay prior to HLT
going true.

PC199-B Specification
3.1.6

27-Feb-1984

Page 38

Mother Board Physical Dimensions

The mother board is a modified quad module with the following connectors:
JI
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
JU
Jll
3.2

Communications Connector
Printer Connector
Video/Keyboard Connector
Extended Comms Connector
Extended Comms Connector
Memory Option Connector
Graphics Option Connector
Power Connector
Floppy Controller Pin
A/B Floppy Board
C/O Floppy Board

25-pin
25-pin
IS-pin
49-pin
49-pin
52-pin
49-pin
13-pin
49-pin
34-pin
34-pin

D-male
D-female
D-male
HEADER
HEADER
HEADER
HEADER

OPTION MODULES

The following option modules will be supported by the Rainbow system:
3.2.1

Memory Option Description/Features

The memory option for the PCI99-B allows the user to upgrade the system
with an additional 64K to 768K bytes of memory.
In addition to the 128K
bytes of standard memory on the system module, a total of 896K bytes of
available memory for the PCI99-B is possible.
There are two basic types of memory options for the PCI99-B.
two different variants.

Each type has

The 64KB and 192KB variants of the memory option use the same 59-class
etch.
The 128KB and 256KB var iants use the same 59-class etch.
The 64KB
and 192KB boards are not user upgradeable.
The 128KB and 256KB boards are
user upgradeable to a maximum of 768KB, using upgrade kits supplied by DEC.
If installed, this memory is always available and never requires wait
states, except when the memory cycle contends with a refresh cycle.
The option is equipped with parity generation and a parity error detect
circui t to notify the 8988 CPU in the event of a memory error.
If such an
error occurs, the memory option interrupts the 8988 CPU through a
non-maskable interrupt. At this point the firmware takes the proper action
to notify the user.
3.2.2

Extended Communications Option - Description/Features

The extended communications option card is a major component of the PCI99-B
system and is connected to the PCI99-B main module via standoffs.
The
purpose of the option is to add a second communications port to the PCI99-B
with bit and byte synchronous capability.
It also gives the PCI90-B a
separate high-speed ser ial communications port to support cl uster ing and
the addition of a high-speed file server. It has two 49-pin connectors
through which it plugs into the system.

PC199-B Specification

Page 39

27-Feb-1984

The extended communications option functions in the following ways within
the PC1913:
1.

By means of the 8237 DMA Controller, block transfers data bidirectionally between memory and the high-speed communications link
(72131 shared MPSC) while maintaining full interrupt support.
The
transfer to memory is into the
PC1913' s shared RAM only and not
into optional memory.

Distinguishes bit protocols at a clock rate of 722 kHz by means of
the 7201 MPSC.

Provides an optional bisync port (72131 MPSC)
the PCl1313's communication port.

Provides two complete serial communications controllers in a single
72131 MPSC package to:

that is a subset of

convert parallel data (from the processor)
required by various protocols.

to serial data, as

Convert serial data streams of the protocols back to parallel
data for the processor.

Buffer incoming and outgoing data, allowing the processor time
to respond.

Insert and delete framing bits and characters.

Calculate and check parity and check CRC error.

f.
g.

In form CPU wha t actions need to be taken and when.
Interface with outside world over discrete modem
lines.

control

Uses a 72131 Bus Interface Controller to provide:
a.

Bus Control Logic (BCL), which determines the internal source
or destination of data and control transfers between the MPSC
and the processor bus.

Interrupt Control Logic (ICL), which prioritizes internal
input requests and places information on the data bus during
an Interrupt Acknowledge cycle (provided the MPSC vectored
interrupt feature has been enabled)

DMA Control Logic (DMACL), which enables the MPSC to make a
data transfer without interrupting the processor.
DMACL
accepts service requests (if they are prioritized) and, like
ICL (in b above), places information on the data bus at
appropr iate times.
DMACL also accepts information from the
data bus. When enabling the MPSC, DMACL activates an external
controller to move data directly from the MPSC to memory or
v ice versa.

PC100-B Specification
d.

27-Feb-1984

Page 40

Clock and Reset Logic (C&RL), which controls timing states in
the MPSC and is (usually) connected to the processor clock.
The extended communications option consists of the following
main components mounted on a printed circuit board:
1.

A 5 MHz 8237 Direct Memory Access Controller (DMAC).
A 7201 Multi-Protocol Serial Controller (MPSC) with the
following features:
a.

A high- speed synchronous ser ial communications port
with external clocks and RS422 differential drive
capab i li ty.

A general-purpose synchronous ser ial communications
port,
with RS423 drive capability, capable of
supporting bisync modes.

Refer to the Extended Communications Option Functional Specification for
further information.
3.2.2.1 Reset Sequence For Extended Communications - The firmware will
perform the following RESET function on the Extended Communications option
upon power up, and any time that it has to handle an interrupt from the
Extended Communications option: A write to 8088 port 27H will reset the
option.
3.2.3

Graphics Option - Description/Features

3.2.3.1 Overview - The Graphics option is a bit mapped color graphics
option which resides on a daughter board inside the Rainbow system box, and
attaches to the Rainbow system board via a 40-pin connector, J7.
The
Graphics option will emulate VT240 functionality in both graphics and text
handling. This includes, but is not limited to, the funcionality of the
VT100, VT102, and VT125.
3.2.3.2 Graphics System Configurations
Three distinct
system
configurations are possible, dependent on the selection of the monitor(s)
and cable(s) that are chosen. These are as follows:
a.

Monochrome Graphics Configuration (VR201 only)

Color Graphics Configuration (VR241 only)

Monochrome and Color Graphics Configuration (VR201 and VR241)

Refer to the Rainbow Graphics Module Specification, A-SP-5415688-0-DBP, for
programming information.
3.2.3.2.1 Monochrome Graphics Configuration
The monochrome graphics
configuration uses the VR201 monitor and a BCC02 cable.
These items are
shipped as standard equipment with the base Rainbow System.
In this
configuration graphical output on the monitor is provided by selecting the
"grey" bit map output from the graphics option module.
This selection is
made by a multiplexer that selects between the "grey" bit map output of the

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 41

graphics option module and the output of the DC011 and DC012 character cell
video display controller subsystem on the motherboard.
The default selection, upon power-up, is the DC011 and DC012 circuit.
The
graphics option module may be selected by setting bit 2 of 8088 I/O port
0AH.
This should be done after the graphics option module has been
programmed for proper screen format. To reselect the character celt v ideo
display controller, bit 2 of I/O port 0AH should be reset to zero.
3.2.3.2.2 Color Graphics Configuration - In the color monitor only graphics
configuration, a VR241 color moni tor and a BCC17 cable are used.
These
items are ordered separately from the base Rainbow System.
In this configuration, graphical output on the color monitor is provided by
the red, grey, and blue bit maps of the graphics option.
The green bit map
is not used, and must be filled with the value 0FFH.
The "green"
information is placed in the grey bit map. The green input of the color
monitor is driven by the monochrome video output of the motherboard.
The function of the monochrome output, and its ability to be multiplexed
between the graphics option module and the OC011 and DC012 character cell
video display controller, have been described in the previous section.
The
selection of the character cell video display controller, as described in
the prev ious section 1 causes the textual information from the DC0l1 and
DC012 to be displayed in green on the color monitor.
When in the text
mode, the red and blue bit maps of the graphics option must be disabled.
3.2.3.2.3 Monochrome and Color Graphics Configuration - The monochrome and
color graphics configuration uses a VR201, a VR241, and a "y" cable (part
number to be assigned).
The VR201 monochrome monitor is dr iven by the
monochrome video output from the motherboard.
This is the only one of the
two monitors that can display textual information from the DC0l1 and DC012
character cell video display controller.
Graphical output to the
monochrome monitor, from the grey bit map of the graphics option module is
not supported in this configuration.
The color monitor is driven by the red, green, and blue outputs of the
graphics option module.
Graphical information is placed in the red, green,
and blue bit maps, respectively, of the option module.
3.2.3.3 Features - The Graphics option for Rainbow will support the
following features:
a.

Medium resolution mode - 240 X 380 pixels X 4 planes

High resolution mode - 240 X 800 pixels X 2 planes

16 simultaneous colors from a pallet of 4096

9600 baud character throughput (hardware only)

Smooth and jump split screen scrolling

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

page 42

3.2.3.4 Differences From PC199-A to PC199-B Graphics Operation
The
PC199-B motherboard circuitry supports 16 shades (levels) of grey scale
from the monochrome video output.
The PC190-A motherboard circuitry
supports 4 shades of grey scale.
The difference is only detectable in the
medium resolution mode; the performance is the same in high resolution
mode.
3.2.4 Winchester Disk Storage Option
3.2.4.1 General Description
The RCD5l-BA subsystem for the PC109-B
consists of two assemblies: an RD5l-A 10 MByte Winchester Disk Drive, and a
controller module.
The RD5l Winchester drive is a low cost, random access, rotating memory
device which stores 10 Mb of data in fixed length blocks on 5-1/4 inch (130
mm) rigid disk media, utilizing standard Winchester technology. The storage
media is contained in the drive in a fixed non-operator removable
configuration.
The RD51 controller is a highly integrated module occupying the Extended
Communication option .slot and has the capability of controlling one ST596
interface compatible Winchester drive. The controller architecture allows
for subsystem extensibil i ty by hav ing sufficient track address and head
select bits to support higher capacity drives when available, assuming
interface and transfer rate remain unchanged.
Connection between drive and
controller is by a molded cable which interfaces 34-pin control and 20-pin
data connectors.
3.2.4.2 Drive Characteristics
1.

Performance Specifications
Formatted capacity
. Per drive
Per surface
Per track
Per sector
Sectors per track

10 MB
2.5 MB
8192 bytes
512 bytes
16

Transfer rate

5M bi ts/sec

Access time
Track to track
Average seek
Maximum seek
Head Settle

3 msec
85 msec, including settle
205 msec,including settle
15 msec

Rotational latency

B.33 msec average
16.7 msec maximum

PC1SS-B Specification
2.

page 43

27-Feb-1984

Functional Specifications

Rotational speed
Recording density
Track densi ty
Cylinders
Tracks
Disks
Physical size
Weight
Power
5 Vdc + 5%

3600 rpm + 1%
9074 bpi
345 tpi
305
1220
2

5.75 inch wide x 3.25 inch
high x 8.05 inch deep
5.0 Ibs.
50 mv peak-to-peak
maximum

ripple

75 mv peak-to-peak
maximum

ripple

0.7 ampere typical
1.0 ampere maximum
12 Vdc + 5%
1.8 ampere typical
3.5 amperes for 20 sec maximum
Heat dissipation
Environment
Temperature
Humidity
Temp. Gr ad ien t
3.2.4.3
1.

25 watts typical
29 watts maximum
50 deg.F to 122 deg.F
20%
to
80%
relative
humidity
20 deg. F/hr •

Controller Characteristics
Functional Specification
Mechanical

3.9 inch x 12.8 inch module
compatible with aft PC100
option slot.

Power

DC 5 Vdc + 5%, 50 mv ripple
1.5 ampere typical,
2.0 amperes maximum
+12 Vdc + 5% 75 mv ripple
.032 ampere typical,
.05 ampere maximum

Environment

DEC STD 102 Class B

Data Transfer

Programmed transfer
Full sector buffer

Drives per controller

Single drive

PC199-B Specification
Features

3.2.4.4

Page 44

27-Feb-1984

Buffered seek
Field formatting capability
ST506 compatible interface
Track position status
Fixed retries at 8
Field diagnostic circuitry

Subsystem Product Specifications

1. Performance specifications
Error rates

Soft Read Errors

1 per 1010 bits read

Hard Read Er ror s

1 per 10 12 bits read

Seek Errors

1 per 10 6 seeks

Reliability Specifications
MTBF

9K POH @ 50% duty cycle
(11K POH Drv., l50K POH Cont.)

MTTR

Less than .5 hours

Faul t

isolation

.95 probability of
drive and controller

isolating

PCl~~-B

Specification

RX5~

4.1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

27-Feb-1984

Page 45

DRIVE

The RX50 subsystem is a 5-l/4-inch flexible diskette drive and a single
board controller which enables the PC100-B to store or retrieve information
on one side of each front-loaded diskette. Each diskette can contain up to
409,600 8-bit bytes (formatted), allowing a total of 819,200 bytes of
storage per device.
4.2

DRIVE CHARACTERISTICS
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.

of recorded surfaces
of diskettes/drive
of tracks/surface
of sectors/track
of bytes/sector
of bits/byte

Capacity (formatted)
per drive
per surface
per track
Access Time, track to track
head load time,
including settle time
rotational latency
random access
drive motor start

2
2

80
10
512
8

819,200 bytes
409,600 bytes
5,120 bytes
6 ms, one track
30 ms. max
100 ms typical, 200 ms max.
290 ms average
500 ms max.

Transfer rate

250K bytes/sec (average)

Disk rotation

300 RPM + 1% , -

Si ze

5.75 inch wide x 3.25 inch high x
8.5 inch deep

VEight

3.8 pounds

4.3

TRACK FORMAT

Each of the tracks is formatted as described below. Each data field is made
up of 512 8-bi t bytes, with a total of 10 data fields or sectors, numbered
01 through 0A (hex) on each track.
The following is a description of the
track fields.

PC199-B Specification
Description

No. of Bytes

Pre ID gap
ID Fields
Sync
Mark
Header !DAM
Track Address
Side Number
Sector Address
Bytes/sector code
CRC
Pose !D gap
Data Fields
sync
Mark
Data DAM
Data
CRC
Post amble
Pre-index gap

Page 46

27-Feb-1984
Contents (HEX)

a
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
22

33
Al**
FE
Track no. (33-4F)
33
Sector n. (3l-3A)
32
Calculated header CRe code
4E

12
3
1
512
2
1
*73

33
Al**
FB
23H
Ca~culated

data CRC code

33
4E

* This field is written once per track until an index field is encountered.
** The clock bit is missing between bits 4 and 5.
Fields modified by a WRITE operation are:

4.4

The DATA SYNC field

The DATA MARK field

The DATA field

The DATA CRC field

The POST AMBLE field

HEADER FORMAT

The diskettes are pre-formatted with header data.
cannot be modified or re-written by the system.
up of seven a-bit bytes as follows:

The header data fields
The header field is made

Byte 1:lD Address Mark (lDAM), FE (hex). This byte coupled with the ID
SYNC FIELD and MARK field is decoded by the controller to identify the
start of a header.
Byte 2:Track Address. This is the absolute binary track address (33 to
4F hex).
Each sector contains track address information to identify
its radial position on 1 of 83 separate tracks.
Byte 3:Zeros.
Byte 4:Sector Address. This is the absolute binary sector address (31
to IJA hex).
Each sector contains address information to identify its
circumferential position on a track. There is no sector 33.

PC199-B Specification

Page 47

27-Feb-1984

Byte 5:Sector Length 92 hex. This byte specifies the number of bytes
contained in one sector.
The RX50 drive is formatted with 512 bytes
per sector.
Byte 6,7:
These two bytes represent the cyclical redundancy check
characters that are calculated from the first five header bytes.
5

PC199-B FIRMWARE
Note
References to the 7201 dual channel USART
should be considered the same as an 8274
since the two IC parts are equivalent and
used interchangeably.

The PC100-B firmware includes two variations of VT102 emulation: "terminal"
mode and "console" mode. "Terminal" mode enables PC100-B to act like a
VT102 connected to a host computer via
the
communications port. The
"console" mode enables PC100-B to act 1 ike a VT102 (without pr inter port
and using FDX data leads only as a protocol) when running programs on the
PC100-B.
The firmware provides services to a "user" for console-out, console- in,
console-in-status, enable/disable cursor, return version number, change
interrupt vector map, ring the keyboard bell, line-at-a-time screen data
transfers, initialize interrupt vectors, return clock rate, l6-bit "key
data", and keyboard LED control.
Communications and printer
system in console mode.

port

drivers

are

supplied

the

operating

The firmware also provides self-test diagnostics and a minimal bootstrap
loader for floppy disks or winchester hard disk option.
5.1

PRODUCT GOALS

The PC100-B VT102 emulation runs a firmware program using the 8088
processor and looks to the user like a VT102.
I t provides subfunctions in
modules usable to other programs. These other programs need to be able to
execute similar functions.
The VT102 emulation processes incoming
character strings in the same manner as a VT102.
The VT102 emulation also
returns characters to the host in a manner similar to that of VT102 given
the same SET-UP environment.
Differences between VT102 and PC100-B emulation of VT102 are listed below.
VT52 emulation within the VT102 emulator performs as a VT102 (for example,
VT102 emulation of VT52. includes most VT102 functions such as 132 columns,
auto-wrap, split screen, double high, double wide, etc.).
The basis for
VT102 functionality is the VT102 engineering specification REV A
(A-SP·-VT102-0-02 A) dated 0l-Aug-1981.

PC199-B Specification

Page 48

27-Feb-l984

5.1.1 Functional Anomalies
The following is a list of deviations from VT102 functionality, variances
with Terminals Interface Architecture (TIA) and other features of the
firmware.
1.

When printing from the screen in terminal mode and encountering a
"blob" character, the VTl02 sends ASCI I "SUB" to the pr inter.
The
PC100-B sends the VT100 line-drawing graphics character "blob"
bracketed by the appropr iate character set selection escape
sequences, if required.
Also PC100-B assumes the printer is
capable of properly receiving 8-bit DEC STD 169 characters.

All 'break key' functions work with keyboard locked but they also
cause the keyboard to unlock.

At the completion of a 'print cursor line' operation, PC100-B sends
the escape str ing to restore the pr inters G0 char set in between
the terminating carriage return and line feed.
VT102 sends it
after the line feed.

Locking the keyboard does stop an auto-repeat but unlocking the
keyboard does not restart auto-repeat unless the original key is
still the one held down.
Any new key must be pressed after the
keyboard is unlocked in order to have it auto-repeat.

When the SET-UP key is pressed to enter SET-UP mode in the PCI00-B,
the key-holding buffer is cleared which causes any unserviced keys
to be lost and SET-UP is immediately honored.

The printer port baud rate selection and the communications port
external clock selection both reside in the same wr i te-only 8088
port. Selecting communications port external clocks can make the
pr inter port baud rate incorrect and selecting pr inter port baud
rates in SET-UP will de-select external clocks for communication.
Also the break control bit for the 7201 is in the same write-only
register as the number-of-data-bits. The firmware can read the NVM
and set this properly for use with terminal mode.
An application
cannot do this.

PC100-B maintains wrap-pending flag unconditionally and tests it
conditionally. VTl02 maintains the flag conditionally and tests it
unconditionally. This affects where the next character goes when
the auto-wrap mode is changed while the cursor is in the
'line-filled' position.

In PC100-B, the escape sequences to select alternate
alternate ROM special graphics are parsed but ignored.

NVM defaults are not the same as VTl02 for the printer port.

ROM

and

10. PC100-B executes Cl control codes for index, next line, horizontal
tab set, reverse index, single shift 2, single shift 3, control
sequence introducer. Reception of any Cl control code will abort an
escape sequence in process (CSI restarts an escape sequence). 8-bit
graphic chars will be treated as if the 8th bit were 0 if received
during an escape sequence.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 49

11. PC100-B always sets insertion/replacement mode to replacement
before saving into NVM.
12. The PC100-B accepts and acts on 8-bit character codes, the VT102
always strips the 8th bit. If 8-bit codes are received in VT52 mode
they will be handled the same as in ANSI mode.
13. Shift out (CTRL/N) and shift in (CTRL/O) in VT52 mode will abort
VT52 'graphics' operation if the char set selected is not the
'graphics' set.
14. Terminal mode print functions are implemented via the 'print
screen' key on the PC100-B.
VT102 uses the keypad 'enter' key.
PC100-B 'print screen' is equivalent to VT102 <shift/enter> and
PC100-B
<control/print
screen>
is
equivalent
to
VT102
<control/enter>.
15. When hold-screen is in effect, all attempts to 'receive' a
character will hang until hold-screen is removed.
This includes
selections from the opening menu, console out requests, data moves
to screen display, terminal mode character reception.
In terminal
mode the receive buffer will continue to fill, but will not be
emptied. When 'full', it will automatically send XOFF if enabled in
SET-UP, otherwise, data will be lost if the host does not stop
sending. The diagnostic routines in ROM have been given a separate
entry to the display process that bypasses the 'hold screen' test.
16. The PC100-B will parse but ignore the escape sequences to set G0
and Gl to the alternate ROM and alternate ROM spec ial graphics (
ESC ( 1 , ESC ( 2 , ESC) 1 , ESC) 2 ). It will also parse but
ignore the escape sequences to run self tests ( ESC [ 2 ; Pn y )
and the LED control ( ESC [ Pn q ).
Also the device status report
request ( ESC [ 5 n ) will always cause the ready, no malfunctions
repl y ( ESC [ 0 n ) •
17. Serial line SET-UP selections of 7-bit mark and space actually use
the 7201 in 8-bit no-parity mode. The mark/space aspect is handled
by the firmware drivers in terminal mode.
In console mode, the
operating system drivers do not make this distinction and set-ups
7M and 7S are the same as 8N in console mode.
18. The HOLD SCREEN key on the PC100-B does not work the same as the NO
SCROLL key on a VT102.
On a VT102, it sends an XOFF/XON as it
toggles back and forth and CTRL/S and CTRL/Q typed from the
keyboard can be used to get the same effect.
In PC100-B, setting
HOLD SCREEN does not necessarily cause an XOFF to be sent. It sets
an internal flag that causes the 'receive character' process to
loop until the flag is cleared.
This effectively 'hangs' any
console output (normal or direct) in console mode. In terminal mode
this 'hang' causes the comm receive buffer to fill up until it
reaches the high water mark at which point it will send an XOFF if
enabled by SET-UP. After the HOLD SCREEN is removed, characters are
removed from the receive buffer until the low water mark is reached
which causes XON to be sent if enabled. As a result of this method
of implementation, PC100-B honors HOLD SCREEN even in 'local',
VT102 does not.

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 50

19. PC100-B resets CAPS LOCK to 'lower case' any time the
test) selection is made from the opening menu.

'5'

(self

20. The following keys generate escape sequences that end in characters
which cause valid selections at opening menu time, cursor arrow
keys will select drives to boot from and PF4 in the keypad will
select self-test.
21. The PC100-B in VT52 mode honors the origin mode setting, VTl02 in
VT52 mode does not.
22 •. In PC100-B, ESC c (reset to initial state)
and cursor keys to their normal modes.
23.

does not reset keypad

In PC100-B, print screen while screen is 'held' is deferred until
after 'hold' is removed and char being 'held' is processed.

24. In PC100-B terminal mode, after using 'hold-screen' on incoming
data, the last char for display is being 'held'.
Enter ing setup,
swi tching to local, and exiting from setup does not clear the
'hold' state or the char. When 'hold' is finally removed, the char
or ig inally being 'held' is displayed before any locally generated
characters.
25. In PC100-B any noise on the printer port DTR line can cause an
interrupt that will set a flag indicating a printer was once
available.
26. In PC100-B, cursor key mode and keypad mode are independent.
This
agrees with the TIA spec but not the VT102.
In the VT102 the
cursor keys only send application codes if both cursor and keypad
modes are set to 'application'.
27. In PC100-B the TAB character always clears the wrap-pend ing flag.
This agrees with the TIA but not the VT102.
As a result auto-wrap
will not be the same if TAB is the 81st char in an 80 char line.
Char 82 will not wrap but char 83 will.
In a VT102, char 82 will
wrap.
28. In PC100-B terminal mode, the second XOFF is sent at 'buffer-full'.
In VT102 the second XOFF is sent 12 char before 'buffer-full'. Also
the PC100-B buffer is 255 char in size, VT102 is 128.
29. PC100-B allows a tab stop in the first column, VT102 does not.
30. Function keys are not ignored when entering the answerback message
and produce unpredictable results.
31. PC100-B aborts escape sequence parsing when it finds an
intermediate char causing all following characters to be displayed.
VT102 aborts the sequence but continues parsing until it finds a
final char so the intervening part of the escape sequence does not
display.
3.2. Due to differences in implementation and timing, the PC100-B and
VT102 can have different transient appearances where the cursor is
concerned. For example, the cursor ,may appear momentarily and/or in
different locations when the same data is sent to both for display.

PC100-B Specification

Page 51

27-Feb-1984

33. In terminal mode, local, printer controller
keyboard characters to the printer.

mode does

not

send

34. Any printer related escape sequence (ANSI or VT52) or keyboard
entry is ignored if the printer DTR signal is not asserted at the
time.
35. Swi tching auto-xon/xoff after establishing contact can cause the
'terminal' to hang under the right conditions.
Typing an xon
(CTRL/Q) in these cases should clear the hung state.
5.2

PERFORMANCE

The performance of the VT102 emulation is at least equal to that of the
actual VT102.
using pure text for data in jump scroll mode, the VTl02
emulation operates at 9600 baud unrestrained as a terminal.
It is a goal
for it to operate at 38.4K baud as a console.
5.3

NON-GOALS

The non-goals for this program are:
1.
Emulation of bugs in the VTl02 software.
2.
SET-UP mode identical to that of the VTl02.
3.
The VTl02 firmware excludes all VTl3l hooks.
for editing, block mode transmit, protected
linkage, etc.
4. All printer baud rates of VTl02 supported.
5.4

There is no support
fields, option ROM

GENERAL

The firmware of the PC100-B provides the following services:
1.

Power-up initialization of hardware

Self-test diagnostics

VT102 emulation - available in "terminal" and "console" modes

Image of Z80A RAM space to be loaded

Boot loader to read track 0, sector 1 of floppy or winchester disk

Opening menu selection process

Automatic shut-off of screen display after 30 minutes of non-use,
and restoration of display on first activity (any keyboard key or
received char) •

Support of the 15 keyboards supported by the Rainbow 100
product.

National language power-up and self test system messages,

10. National language Boot Menu,

(PCl00-A)

PCIgg-B Specification

Page 52

27-Feb-I984

11. Implementation of the compose algorithm,
12. National language Set-ope
13. Choice of DEC 8-bit codes or national replacement characters
The firmware is organized such that the VTl0'2 emulation primitives form the
"console" functionality for use by "applications" through the interface
layer. When in "terminal" mode a background loop is entered which calls on
the "console" pr imi tives and adds the necessary functional i ty to provide
full "terminal" mode.
An interface layer is placed over the "console" primitives to provide an
"application" with means of accessing those primitives.
Note
In "console" mode there is no support provided
for the printer or the communication ports.
This hardware
(720'1) must be controlled
directly by the operating system.
For "applications" that need more immediate control of the hardware,
services are provided to obtain "low leval" key information, enable/disable
cursor, and transfer data directly to screen RAM.
The interface between the "application" and
using a software interrupt, with arguments
registers.

the firmware is implemented
passed and returned in CPO

This leads to a layered structure as diagrammed below.
From the firmware
view point, the operating system in this example is an "application". It
can actually be anything, including another firmware routine.
All entries to firmware routines from external processes are via a software
interrupt. This makes the interface release- independent because ROM code
loads the proper vectors during initialization.
81.388 side

---::---I-~~;~~~--I-------------so
1 j ---;~;;~;~~~----j
SYSTEM
************* ***** ****************
VT102
*
*
* 'TERMINAL' *

INTERFACE
LAYER

*
*

*************************************

So indicates sophisticated user

***** indicates located in ROM

PC199-B Specification
5.4.1

Page 53

27-Feb-1984

Text Strings

All text strings are located in a single section of the code space so they
may be changed with no affect on ROM code (foreign languages).
The text
strings are accessed by a table of pointers which remains in a fixed
location so routines do not need to know the exact text locations.
This
table and its associated text strings are in one ROM to minimize changes
required for other language versions.
The keyboard key-to-code mapping
tables are also in this same ROM.
The total amount of ROM space allotted to text strings cannot be increased.
There is no restriction on individual string sizes, only total bytes used
and order of messages.
5.4.2

Character Sets

As with the VTlf32, the VTlf32 emulation supports the
sets: UK, USASCII, and Special Graphics.

following

character

The character generator ROM also contains the displayable right half of the
DEC multinational character set, GR (shown as the DEC supplemental graphic
set in DEC STD 169).
These characters are accessed by direct writing of
data into the screen via interrupt 413 calls or by reception of the
corresponding 8-bit code. The character generator ROM also contains space
for 31 additional displayable characters reserved for future use.
The "console" VTlf32 accepts 8-bit character codes to display the alternate
characters.
The "terminal" VTlf32 accepts 7- or 8-bit codes (depending on
comm port parameters) and displays characters based on character set
mapping through escape sequences.
The "console" also works with escape
sequence character set mapping and 7-bit characters.
It also accepts 8-bit Cl control codes for index, next line, horizontal tab
set, reverse index, single shift 2, single shift 3, control sequence
introducer.
Any Cl control code will abort an escape sequence in process
and CSI will restart it.
Table 4 is a table of the characters and corresponding codes available in
the PClf3f3B for display.
The codes are actually a part of the address for
the bit-map of that character in the character generator ROM. They are the
upper 8 bits of the address; the lower 4 bits select the proper scan line
wi thin the character.
There are 6 unused "scan lines" at the end of each
character (uses 113 out of 16) •
/
Note
All undefined and reserved characters are
indicated by a reversed question mark.

PC199-B Specification

Page 54

27-Feb-1984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

fiHJ

ALL
SF

fiJ2
fiJ3
fiJ4
fiJ5
fiJ6
fiJ7
fiJ8
fiJ9
fiJA
fiJB
fiJC
fiJD
fiJE
fiJF
lfiJ

12
13

14
15
16

17
18
19
1A

lB
lC

6fiJ
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
7fiJ
71
72

73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B

2fiJ

7C
7D
23
7E
2fiJ

1D
IE
IF

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
S PECL GRAPH ICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
S PECL GRAPH ICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS

NAME OF CHARACTER

NULL, IGNORED ON RCV, DISPLAYS
A BLANK
BLANK
DIAMOND
CHECKERBOARD (BLOB)
HT (HORIZONTAL TAB)
FF (FORM FEED)
CR (CARRIAGE RETURN)
LF (LINE FEED)
DEGREE SYMBOL
PLUS/MINUS SIGN
NL (NEW LINE)
VT (VERTICAL TAB)
LOWER RIGHT CORNER
UPPER RIGHT CORNER
UPPER LEFT CORNER
LOWER LEFT CORNER
CROSSING LINES
HORIZONTAL LINE, SCAN 1
HORIZONTAL LINE, SCAN 3
HORIZONTAL LINE, SCAN 5
HORIZONTAL LINE, SCAN 7
HORIZONTAL LINE, SCAN 9
LEFT 'T'
RIGHT 'T'
BOTTOM 'T'
TOP 'T'
VERTICAL BAR
LESS-THAN OR EQUAL
GREATER-THAN OR EQUAL
PI SYMBOL
NOT EQUAL SIGN
U.K. POUND STERLING SIGN
CENTERED DOT
SPACE
EXCLAMATION POINT
DOUBLE QUOTES
NUMBER SIGN

(POUND SIGN)

DOLLAR SIGN
PER-CENT SIGN

PCl~~-B

Specification

Page 55

27-Feb-1984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

UK!USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECr, GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS

(Continued)

NAME OF CHARACTER

AM PERSAND SIGN
SINGLE QUOTE
LEFT PARENTHESES
RIGHT PARENTHESES
ASTERISK SIGN
PLUS SIGN
COMMA
DASH

(MINUS SIGN)

PERIOD
SLASH

(FRACTION BAR)

NUMERAL 0
NUMERAL 1
NUMERAL 2
NUMERAL 3
NUMERAL 4
NUMERAL 5
NUMERAL 6
NUMERAL 7
NUMERAL 8
NUMERAL 9
COLON
SEMI -COLON
LEFT ANGLE BRACKET
EQUALS SIGN

PC199-B Specification

Page 56

27-Feb-1984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes (Continued)
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

418

518

UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCI I
SPECL GRAPHICS

NAME OF CHARACTER

RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET
QUESTION MARK
AT SIGN
CAPITAL A
CAPITAL B
CAPITAL C
CAPITAL D
CAPITAL E
CAPITAL F
CAPITAL G
CAPITAL H
CAPITAL I
CAPITAL J
CAPITAL K
CAPITAL L
CAPITAL M
CAPITAL N
CAPITAL 0
CAPITAL P
CAPITAL Q
CAPITAL R
CAPITAL S
CAPITAL T
CAPITAL U

PClOO-B Specification

Page 57

27-Feb-l984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes (Continued)
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
78
7C

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C

UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
SPECL GRAPHICS
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCU
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASPI
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII
UK/USASCII

NAME OF CHARACTER

CAPITAL V
CAPITAL W
CAPITAL X
CAPITAL Y
CAPITAL Z
LEFT SQUARE 8RACKETS
BACK-SLASH
RIGHT SQUARE 8RACKETS
CIRCUMFLEX
UNDERLINE
ACCENT GRAVE
LOWER CASE A
LOWER CASE B
LOWER CASE C
LOWER CASE D
LOWER CASE E
LOWER CASE F
LOWER CASE G
LOWER CASE H
LOWER CASE I
LOWER CASE J
LOWER CASE K
LOWER CASE L
LOWER CASE M
LOWER CASE N
LOWER CASE 0
LOWER CASE P
LOWER CASE Q
LOWER CASE R
LOWER CASE S
LOWER CASE T
LOWER CASE U
LOWER CASE V
LOWER CASE W
LOWER CASE X
LOWER CASE Y
LOWER CASE Z
LEFT BRACES
VERTICAL LINE (BROKEN)

PCl99-B Specification

Page 58

27-Feb-l9a4

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes (Continued)
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

70
7E
7F

UK/USASCI I
UK/USASCII
ALL

80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
80
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
90
9E
9F
A0
Al
A2
A3
A4
AS
A6
A7
A8
A9

NAME OF CHARACTER

RIGHT BRACES
TILDE
RESERVED FOR CHARACTER
GENERATOR ROM CHECKSUM
DISPLAYS JUNK, SHOULD NOT BE
USED
UNFILLED RECTANGLE FOR
'A UTO-B LANKED CURSOR'
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
NOT USED
INVERTED EXCLAMATION POINT
CENT SIGN
U.K. POUND STERLING SIGN
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
YEN SIGN
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
SECTION SIGN
GENERAL CURRENCY SIGN
COPYRIGHT SIGN

PCl00-B Specification

Page 59

27-Feb-l984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes (Continued)
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF

BIJ
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BA

BB
BC
BD
BE
BF

CIJ
Cl
C2

C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA

CB
CC
CD
CE
CF

DIJ
01
02

D3
D4

D5
06

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

NAME OF CHARACTER

FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR
LEFT ANGLE QUOTATION MARKS
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
DEGREE SIGN
PLUS/MINUS SIGN
SUPERSCRIPT 2
SUPERSCRIPT 3
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
MICRO SIGN
PARAGRAPH SIGN, PILCROW
MIDDLE DOT
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
SUPERSCRIPT 1
MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR
RIGHT ANGLE QUOTATION MARK
FRACTION 1/4
FRACTION 1/2
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
INVERTED QUESTION MARK
CAPITAL A WITH GRAVE ACCENT
CAPITAL A WITH ACUTE ACCENT
CAPITAL A WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
CAPITAL A WITH TILDE
CAPITAL A WITH UMLAUT
CAPITAL A WITH RING
CAPITAL AE DIPTHONG
CAPITAL C WITH CEDILLA
CAPITAL E WITH GRAVE ACCENT
CAPITAL E WITH ACUTE ACCENT
CAPITAL E WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
CAPITAL E WITH UMLAUT
CAPITAL I WITH GRAVE ACCENT
CAPITAL I WITH ACUTE ACCENT
CAPITAL I WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
CAPITAL I WITH UMLAUT
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
CAPITAL N WITH TILDE
CAPITAL 0 WITH GRAVE ACCENT
CAPITAL 0 WITH ACUTE ACCENT
CAPITAL 0 WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
CAPITAL 0 WITH TILDE
CAPITAL 0 WITH UMLAUT

PC199-B Specification

Page 60

27-Feb-1984

Table 4. Displayable Characters and Corresponding Codes (Continued)
CHAR
CODE
IN
RAM
8 BITS
(HEX)

D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E9
El
E2
E3
E4
ES
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
F9
Fl
F2
F3
F4
FS
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF

CHAR
CODE
RCVD
7 BITS

CHAR SET
(DEFINES RULES FOR
RCVD TO RAM
TRANSLATE)

NAME OF CHARACTER

CAPITAL OE DIPTHONG
CAPITAL o WITH SLASH
CAPITAL U WITH GRAVE ACCENT
CAPITAL U WITH ACUTE ACCENT
CAPITAL U WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
CAPITAL U WITH UMLAUT
CAPITAL Y WITH UMLAUT
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
GERMAN SMALL SHARP S
LOWER CASE A WITH GRAVE ACCENT
LOWER CASE A WITH ACUTE ACCENT
LOWER CASE A WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
LOWER CASE A WITH TILDE
LOWER CASE A WITH UMLAUT
LOWER CASE A WITH RING
LOWER CASE AE DIPTHONG
LOWER CASE C WITH CEDILLA
LOWER CASE E WITH GRAVE ACCENT
LOWER CASE E WITH ACUTE ACCENT
LOWER CASE E WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
LOWER CASE E WITH UMLAUT
LOWER CASE I WITH GRAVE ACCENT
LOWER CASE I WITH ACUTE ACCENT
LOWER CASE I WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
LOWER CASE I WITH UMLAUT
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
LOWER CASE N WITH TILDE
LOWER CASE 0 WITH GRAVE ACCENT
LOWER CASE 0 WITH AC UTE ACCENT
LOWER CASE 0 WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
LOWER CASE o WITH TILDE
LOWER CASE o WITH UMLAUT
LOWER CASE OE DIPTHONG
LOWER CASE o WITH SLASH
LOWER CASE U WITH GRAVE ACCENT
LOWER CASE U WITH ACUTE ACCENT
LOWER CASE U WITH CIRCUMFLEX
ACCENT
LOWER CASE U WITH UMLAUT
LOWER CASE Y WITH UMLAUT
RESERVED (DEC STD 169)
NOT ALLOWED, THIS IS
'TERMINATION' CODE

PC100-B Specification
5.5

27-Feb-1984

Page 61

START-UP/SHUT DOWN/RESET

5.5.1

Power-up Initialization

This process initializes all the hardware, including any indicated
EXPANSION RAM options and all the flags, pointers, etc. Power-up must also
read in the contents of the NVM and configure itself accordingly.
The NVM
contains information on memory configuration for ~use by self-test
diagnostics. It shows which 64K memory blocks are installed.
Note
NVM contents refers to the data stored in
non-volatile memory, normally by means of
the Set-up process, that affects the
system operation as defined by the
various parameters.
The NVM consists of two elements, the non-volatile storage part and a
vOlatile shadow RAM part. A recall operation transfers the contents of the
non-volatile storage part to the shadow RAM part.
A store operation
transfers the contents of the shadow RAM part into the non-volatile storage
part, destroying any previous contents.
Data can only be transferred
to/from the cpu from the shadow RAM part, and only when the NVM is not
either in the recall or store modes of operation.
A CRC is calculated and
stored along with the shadow RAM data.
This CRC is verified after any
recall operation. If the CRC does not verify, the recovery procedure is:
1.

A second recall is done.

If second recall is OK, continue as normal.

If second recall is also bad, it could be due to two reasons:

5.5.2

first time ever used, contains random data

bad NVM

Put defaults into shadow RAM, store into NVM and display
INITIALIZED TO DEFAULTS message and continue as normal.

NVM

Selection of Keyboard/Language

The NVM maintains a binary valued variable that indicates whether or not a
keyboard has been selected.
This var iable is tested just before the
opening menu is displayed.
If a keyboard has been selected, then
everything proceeds as normal using the keyboard and the implied language.
If a keyboard has not been selected, a screen is displayed that allows the
operator to make a keyboard selection. The operator may choose to skip the
selection process which then uses the current language of the cluster. The
selection process uses keys that are the same in all languages, arrow keys
to make cho ice and I select I to make it happen.
To change a keyboard
selection after the initial selection is made the operator must enter
Set-up, set the keyboard to I unselected I , save in NVM, and then reset the
system to get the selection screen.
Any error message that occurs when a

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 62

keyboard selection has not been made will appear in the default language of
the current cluster.
Error messages normally appear in the selected
language. In Set-up, the choice of keyboard 'selected' or 'not selected' is
the only selection the opera tor can make.
Following a 'not selected'
choice, the operator must save the set-ups into NVM and then reset the
system to get the keyboard selection choices in order to select ci new
keyboard or remain wi th 'not selected'. The defaul t is 'not selected'.<
5.5.3

Power-Off

No attempt to do anything special is made on power-off.
5.5.4

Hardware Resetting

The system resets similar to a VT102.
Enter Set-up mode and press the Ctrl
key and the Set-up key simultaneously.
The resetting is accomplished by
jumping to a separate location at the start of the self-test diagnostics.
Entry at this point distinguishes it from a power-up start.
This assumes
the system is still capable of entering Set-up.
If not, the only recovery
is to cycle the power off and on.
CAUTION
Leaving interrupts disabled for 100 ms or
more in the 8088 CPU causes the hardware
failure detect circuitry to be activated.
It is possible to disable the hardware
failure detect circuitry, if it is
mandatory to leave interrupts masked for
a longer period of time.
This procedure
may adversely affect the video display
and
any real-time dependent system
operations; use with care and discretion.
The following is the correct proced ure:
1.) disable interrupts using a eLI
instruction, 2.) disable the hardware
fail ure detect circui t by wr i ting a 00H
to 8088 I/O port 10C (hex).
The hardware
failure detect circuit will be re-enabled
automatically, after the 8088 interrupt
mask has been re-enabled, using the STI
instruction.
5.5.5

RAM Parity Error

When the expansion RAM is installed, a par i ty error activates the NMI
input.
The NMI causes the ram option fail ure message to be displayed on
the screen and causes the bell to beep. No more options are allowed except
to enter Set-Up and reset the system.
If an operating system needs to handle parity errors itself, it takes over
the NMI interrupt vector.

PC199-B Specification
5.6

27-Feb-1984

Page 63

MEMORY-MAPPED VIDEO ACCESS SERVICE

A "sophisticated user" accesses the screen/attribute RAM directly for fast
data transfers.
Note
The character stored in the screen RAM by
this process is actually a code (not
necessar ily ASCII).
This code is bits
4-11 of the address in the character
generator ROM for the first scan line of
the bit pattern of that character.
The screen display is a linked list and there are several related tables,
flags, and pointers that must be retained.
It is imperative, then, that
the "sophisticated user" follow certain restrictions when directly
accessing the screen/attribute RAM.
1.

In order to guarantee a known starting condition and remove all
effects of scroll ing, double height, double width 1 ine, top and
bottom marg ins, or ig in mode, and so on, the user must send the
escape sequence to set the desired screen width.
These also place
the cursor at the top, left screen position and clear the screen.
for 89 columns escape [ ? 3 1
for 132 columns escape [ ? 3 h
(Note that a lower case L is used here.)

The standard escape sequences to position the cursor and set double
height and width lines can be used.
The user is responsible for
keeping track of what lines have been modified so no attempt is
made to put more characters on a line than it can hold.
CAUTION
Each 1 ine ends with a termination code
and pointer to the next line.
Video
display hardware uses these in its
operation.
Destroying these val ues in
either screen display or attribute space
causes unpred ictable resul ts on the
display.

3. Each character (data) screen position has a related attribute. When
the screen width escape sequence initializes the screen, these
attributes are all set to the "off" condition.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 64

Bit assignments for character attributes are:
Bit 0

Reverse Video
normal
reverse video

0
I

Bit I
0
I

Bit 2
0

Blink
blink
not blink

Bit 3

o
I

5.7

Bold
bold
not bold

Underscore
underscore
not underscore

Contents of character locations can be changed at any time.
However due to the way the cursor is implemented, attributes at the
cursor position cannot be changed at will. When the user wishes to
change the attributes of the character at the cursor position, he
must use the DISABLE CURSOR function.
This removes all cursorrelated attribute affects.
After the attributes have been changed
as desired, the user must use the ENABLE CURSOR function to restore
the cursor to operation. See subheads 6.1.5 and 6.1.6 for these
functions.

KEY ACCESS SERVICES

This allows a "sophisticated user" to obtain low level key data (for
example, a code for left arrow instead of an escape sequence) to simplify
the process of detecting special keys.
If no key is waiting for detection
a "no data" status is returned.
Two different layers of access are provided. The lowest level (Levell)
gives a unique 16-bit code for any key in combination with any or all of
the Shift, Caps Lock, or Ctrl keys.
It also identifies the function keys
with a unique code (reference section 6.1.4).
The highest level (Level 2)
is the same as the VT102 generates, plus additional 8-bit codes for certain
keys and foreign keyboards.
Certain keys are trapped out for special processing and are never seen in
the buffer. The following keys cannot be remapped:
KEY

POSITION

Hold Screen
Set-up
Control
Caps Lock
Shift Keys
Compose Character

G99
G01
C99
C00
B99,B11
A99

Any other keys may be remapped by a "console" mode user.

PC100-B Specification

Page 65

27-Feb-1984

FUNCTIONAL DEFINITION

6.1

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

The VT102 emulation is always resident
used even without working floppy disks.

in the PC1(J0-B I s

ROM,

and can be

The VT1(J2 "console" emulator must be completely interrupt driven.
The
"terminal" VT102 uses a "background" routine to add the add i t ional
functions of printer port and modem protocols.
The VT102 HDX modem
protocols are not supported by the firmware.
The VT1(J2 emulator must operate in two distinct modes.
Terminal mode
provides VTl02 capabilities. Console mode also has VT1(J2 capabilities with
these exceptions: no printer port, no local echo, and modem protocol
equivalent to full duplex data leads only.
6.2

CLUSTERING OF LANGUAGES

The amount of character storage space required to include all language
var iations in a single set of 128K bit ROMs is too great.
Therefore, the
languages are 'clustered I in 5 sets of 3 languages. Engl ish is part of all
sets.
The first set consists of English, French, and German.
This set
covers keyboards for U. S., UK, Ireland, Engl ish and French Canada, French
Belgium, Germany, Austria, German and French, Switzerland, and France.
This accounts for approximately 75% of the European market. The second set
consists of English, Dutch, and French.
The third set consists of English,
Swedish and Finnish.
The fourth set consists of English, Norwegian, and
Danish.
The fifth set consists of English, Italian, and Spanish.
The
keyboard selection 10 is stored in NVM. Two nibbles are assigned to the 10
to allow for expansion beyond 16 keyboard variations.
The keyboard IDs and
their associated languages are assigned as shown in Table 5.
Table 5. Keyboard 10 Codes and Associated Languages
SET
2

SET

SET
5

X
X

X
X
X

SET
KEYBOARD 10
13
1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9

113
11

12
13

- US
CANADIAN FR
BRITISH
FINNISH
SWEDISH
NORWEGIAN
DANISH
SPANISH
GERMAN/AUSTRIAN
SWISS FR
SWISS GER
DUTCH
FLEMISH
FRENCH
ITALIAN

LANGUAGE
English
French
English
Finnish
Swedish
Norweg ian
Danish
Spanish
German
French
German
Dutch
Dutch
French
Italian

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 66

Tabl e 5 ID codes were chosen for best code efficiency in the keyboard
translation process.
A table is associated with each cluster ROM that
defines the allowable keyboards and the associated relative languages for
those keyboards.
This enables the keyboard selection routine to allow all
the choices with default languages assigned to keyboards whose natural
language is not in the current cluster.
Table 5 contains one entry for
each of the 15 (or more) keyboards.
Each entry contains a number which
defines the 'relative language' for that keyboard. For example, in cluster
1, English is relative language 0, French is 1, German is 2. These relative
language numbers are used as an index into a group of text strings that are
for the same message.
The text str ing s are bro ken into two types; those
that are the same in all languages, and those that are different as a
function of language.
The' fixed' text strings are accessed in the same
manner as currently used, pointer to 'tag name'
in diagnostics and
'terminator count' in Set-Up.
I f the string is different by language, it is accessed in diagnostics by
counting terminators according to the 'relative language' in use after
first getting the start of the group of strings by the usual method.
The
two groups of text types are kept together with the 'fixed' type first in
order.
The type of algorithm to use is then determined by comparing the
string location pointer with the start address of the first of the
'different' strings.

Set-up uses a method of counting string terminators to access a message.
The 2-group approach works in Set-Up by multiplying the message number by
the number of languages supported and then counting that number of
terminators to get to the block of text strings for that message. Then the
language index value advances that many more terminators to get the actual
text string desired.
This technique is independent of number of languages,
size of strings, and allows for conservation of data space by extracting
any common elements.
6.3

TRANSMITTED CHARACTERS

The LK201 keyboard generates a code for each key which identi fies the
physical location of that key on the keyboard.
These position codes are
converted to character codes by means of ROM-resident language tables. The
ROM must be mapped by language to the keyboard (different keycap legends) •
Two different types of codes are passed to routines requesting keyboard
data. These types are designated as Levelland Level 2.
Level 2 is the
standard 7 bit codes transmitted by a VT102 with the addition of the DEC
STD 169 multi-national character codes being sent in the context of the
current language option.
At Level 2 (terminal mode) all keys not defined
in a normal VT102 send no code and cause the bell to beep. In console mode,
level 2, the function keys not defined in a normal VT102 send escape
sequences.
Level 2 supports all the VT102 key-generated escape sequences
(cursor and keypad keys)
in the current key mode context (keypad
numeric/application, cursor key normal/application). In addition foreign
keyboard support incl udes a correspondence/data processing mode that allows
up to four di fferent character codes per key.
This mode is a Set-Up
parameter and allows a foreign keyboard user to access key codes normally
lost because of special character requirements.

PC100-B Specification
6.3.1

27-Feb-1984

Page 67

Multi-National 8-Bit/National 7-Bit Character Selection

The invoking of the a-bit/7-bit character translation is provided as part
of the binary parameter field.
The default is a-bit operation. The display
for this Set-up parameter will be the 27th location in the major field
marked 'PARAM SET'.
The minor field display will be:
CHAR

CODES

DEc-a
7-bit

6.3.2

National 7-Bit Character Codes

A shell is placed over the keyboard output function and the display input
function tha t conditionally translates a-bi t/7-bi t character codes.
The
translation is dependent on the state of an NVM binary valued variable to
select either a-bit multinational or 7-bit national language operation.
The translation process only appl ies to the 'normal' console/terminal I/O
paths; it does not apply to the extended console or 16-bit keyboard paths.
Choice of the 7-bit National Replacement Characters (NRC) brings in a shell
that performs the translation (i f required).
There are two parts to the
shell; keyboard input and video display.
NRC character sets are keyboard
related; there is one and only one NRC set available to a particular
keyboard. The current mappings of keyboard to NRC are as follows:
Keyboard

NRC table to be used

AIDer ican
French/Canada
UK
Finnish
Swedish
Norwegian
Danish
Spanish
German
Swiss/French
Swiss/German
Dutch
Flemish
French
Italian

No table
French/Canada
UK
Finnish
Swedish
Norweg ian
Danish
Spanish
German
Swiss
Swiss
Dutch
French
French
Ital ian

If there is no table, then no replacement will be attempted.
6.3.2.1 Keyboard Input Algorithm - No replacement is attempted i f we are
in DEC a-bit mode.
No replacement is attempted i f there is no NRC table
associated with a keyboard.
No replacement is attempted in escape or
control sequences.
If a 7-bit code is encountered, it is looked up in the
NRC for the current keyboard.
If it is found then no code is returned and
the keyboard bell is rung.
If it is not found the 7-bit code is sent as
normal.
If an a-bit code is encountered, it is looked up in the NRC for
the current keyboard.
If it is found it is replaced by the appropr iate

PCl90-B Specification

Paqe 68

27-Feb-l984

7-bit code, also found in the NRC table, and it is this 7-bit code which is
returned as the character entered.
If it is not found then no code is
returned and the bell is rung as above.
6.3.2.2 video Display Algorithm - No replacement is attempted if we are in
DEC 8-bit mode.
No replacement is attempted if there is no NRC table
associated with a keyboard.
No replacement is attempted if the character
set is other than USASC!I.
If a replacement 7-bit code is encountered, it
is looked up in the NRC for the current keyboard.
If it is found, it is
replaced by the appropriate 8-bit code, also found in the NRC table and it
is this 8-bit code that is displayed.
If it is not found, it is the 7-bit
character which is displayed.
If an 8-bit code is encountered, it is
displayed as normal.
NRC TABLES

French/Canadian.
8-bi t character
lower case a with grave
lower case a with circumflex
lower case c with cedilla
lower case e with grave
lower case e with acute
lower case e with circumflex
lower case i with circumflex
lower case a with circumflex
lower case u with grave
lower case u with circumflex

[

}
{

1
A

Finnish.
8-bi t character
upper A with
upper A with
upper 0 with
upper U with
lower a with
lower a with
lower e with
lower a with
lower u with

7-bi t character

umlaut
ring
umlaut
umlaut
umlaut
ring
acute
umlaut
umlaut

7-bit character
[

1
~
{
}

Swedish.
8-bit character
upper E with acute
upper A with umlaut
upper A with ring
upper 0 with umlaut
upper U with umlaut
lower a with umlaut
lower a with ring
lower e with acute
lower a with umlaut

7-bit character
@

[

1
\
A

{

PC1""-B Specification
3

Page 69

27-Feb-1984

Swedish (continued)
8-bit character

7-bit character

lower u with umlaut
4

Norwegian/Danish.
8-bit character
upper
upper
upper
upper
upper
lower
lower
lower
lower
lower

A with umlaut
A with ring
AE dipthong
o with slash
U with umlaut
a with umlaut
a with ring
ae dipthong
0 with slash
u with umlaut

inverted exclamation mark
br itish pound
section sign
degree sign
inverted question mark
upper N with tilda
lower c with cedilla
lower n with tilda

1
[

\
}
{

1
7-bit character
[

#
@

{

1
\
}

German.
8-bit character
section sign
upper A with
upper 0 with
upper U with
sharp S8
lower a with
lower 0 with
lower u with

Spanish.
8-bit character

7-bit character

7-bit character
@

umlaut
umlaut
umlaut

[

\
1

umlaut
umlaut
umlaut

French.
8-bit character
british pound
section sign
degree sign
lower a with grave
lower c with cedilla
lower e with grave
lower e with acute

7-bit character
#

1
[

}
{

PC100-B Specification
7

Page 70

27-Feb-1984

French (continued)

8-bit character

7-bit character

lower u with grave
Umlaut sign
8

Italian.
8-bit character
british pound
section sign
degree sign
lower i with grave
lower a with grave
lower c with cedilla
lower e with grave
lower e with acute
lower 0 with grave
lower u with grave

7-bit character

i
@

[

{

}

]

UK.
8-bit character

7-bit character

Bri tish Pound sign

Swiss.
8-bit character
small
small
small
small
small
small
small
small
small
small
small
small

u with grave
a with grave
e with acute
c with cedilla
e with circumflex
i with circumflex
e with grave
o with circumflex
a with umlaut
0 with umlaut
u with umlaut
u with circumflex

7-bit character
number sign, i
commercial at, @
left square bracket,
backslash, \
right square bracket,
circumflex,
underl ine,
grave accent, ,
left curly bracket, {
vertical line, I
right curly bracket, }
tilde, A

Dutch.
8-bit character

7-bit character

br i ti sh pound
3/4 sign *
ij sign **
1/2 sign
vertical bar
umlaut sign ***
florin sign ****
1/4 sign
acute accent

#
@

[

\
]

{

PCl99-B Specification

27-Feb-l984

Page 71

The 3/4 sign is displayed as a reverse question mark.
*
The ij sign is displayed as lower y with umlaut.
** The
umlaut sign is displayed as double quotes.
***
**** The florin sign is displayed as lower f.
Note
The 3/4, ij and florin signs are not in
DEC STD 169 nor engraved on the Dutch
keyboard and thus cannot be entered
directly.
Because the Dutch set replaces some 7-bit characters as well as 8-bit
characters, the algorithm is slightly different. If the Dutch set is in use
then the 8-bit table is searched. If the character is found, it is
replaced; else the 7-bit part is searched.
6.3.3

Support For TIA Control Code Generation Using Number Keys

The foreign keyboards have several symbols missing that are used on the
domestic keyboard, in conj unction wi th <ctrl> to generate control codes.
The TIA defined an alternate method for generating these control codes. The
keyboard routine has been modified to use these keys (the number keys 2
through 8) in combination with the control key as specified by the TIA and
shown below.
This is implemented on all keyboards, including US, as per
the TIA.
Also, the shift/dependency to generate the control codes in the
'normal' way has been removed.
For example, it is no longer necessary to
type shift/tilde with control to generate the RS, only type the key
containing tilde (as the shifted character).
Key

ASCII
2
3
4
5
6

7
8

6.3.4

NULL
ESC
FS
GS
RS

US
DEL

Control Char
00H
lBH
lCH
lDH
lEH
lFH
7FH

Auto-Repeat Control Codes Generated By the Keyboard

The keyboard algorithms are modified to allow control keys to auto-repeat.
All keys will auto-repeat, if it is enabled, including those keys that
generate control codes.
The only time auto-repeating is not allowed is
during compose sequences.
Level 1 is only available to a sophisticated user in console mode.
This
provides a unique l6-bit code for any key in combination with the CAPS
LOCK, SHIFT, and CONTROL keys with the following exceptions:
Hold Screen - not available
SET-UP - not available
Compose character - not available

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

The keyboard may be broken into several
its own general characteristics.

Page 72

functional key groups.

Each has

Note
The following refers to the keyboard
layout shown in the figure at the end of
this section. This layout differs from a
VT 102 keyboard.
6.3.5

Unseen Fixed Function Keys - Hold Screen, Set-up

These keys,always provide the same function regardless of console
terminal mode and are never provided to any level of output request.

6.3.5.1 HOLD SCREEN
POSITION
unfreezes it (toggle mode) •

G99

Freezes

the

screen

display

Any attempt to output any character is blocked until Hold Screen is "off."
May cause an XOFF to be sent in terminal mode if receive buffer reaches
high water mark and auto XON/XOFF is enabled.
This is equal to the NO
SCROLL key on a VT102.
Note
If a program does not want to be 'hung
up' by a display routine that is being
blocked due to a 'hold screen' in effect,
the user should test the state (available
in SYSPAR) and put off "console out"
until the user unblocks the display
process by turning the Hold Screen off.
6.3.5.2 SET-UP - POSITION G01 - This causes entry to and exit from Set-up
mode. A system reset occurs when the CONTROL key is pressed in combination
with the Set-up key while in SET-UP mode.
6.3.5.3 COMPOSE CHARACTER
POSITION A99
The compose algorithm, as
described in DEC STD 169, will be implemented. However, the keyclick and
bell specifications found in the standard may not be completely adhered to.
6.3.6 Fixed Function Keys LOCK, TAB, RETURN, DELETE

ESCAPE, LINE FEED, BACKSPACE, SHIFT, CONTROL,

These keys always prov ide the same function regardless of
terminal mode and are provided to any level of output request.
6.3.6.1 ESCAPE - POSITION Gll escape character code, IB (hex).
CAPS LOCK keys.

console

Escape at all times generates the ASCII
It is not affected by SHIFT, CONTROL, or

PC1101O-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 73

6.3.6.2 LINE FEED - POSITION G13 - Line feed at all times generates the
ASCII line feed character code, OA (hex).
I t is not affected by SHIFT,
CONTROL, or CAPS LOCK keys.
6.3.6.3 BACKSPACE - POSITION G12 ASCII backspace character code, 108
CONTROL, or CAPS LOCK keys.

Backspace at all times generates the
(hex).
It is not affected by SHIFT,

6.3.6.4 SHIFT (2 Keys) -POSITION B99, Bll - Shift at all levels causes a
modification of the codes being generated by the alpha, numeric, and symbol
keys. For alpha keys it sends the upper case code. The numeric and symbol
keys send the code for the upper character shown on the keycap.
If there
are mul tiple upper and/or lower characters shown on the keycap, then the
upper character/case is sen t accord ing to the correspondence/da ta
processing mode in effect at the time.
6.3.6.5 CONTROL
POSITION C99
Control at all levels causes a
modification of the codes being generated by the alpha keys and some of the
symbol keys and the space bar. Some of the symbol keys are only accessible
with some foreign keyboards by using the data processing mode. The control
codes remain associated with the keycap legend. If for example the alpha
key for C is moved, a <Ctrl/C> still generates the ETX code.
6.3.6.6 LOCK - POSITION CIOIO - Lock at all levels caupes selection of upper
case for all alpha keys when "on." "On" state is irg'jicated when the LED
marked "Lock" is lit.
6.3.6.6.1 CAPS-SHIFT LOCK FUNCTION - The handling of the shift/caps lock
mode is determined by an NVM parameter.
NVM contains a binary valued
var iable that defines whether the • lock' key functions as a shi ft or ,caps
lock. If shift lock, then all keys that have a shifted representation will
generate the code for the shifted character.
If caps lock, then only
alphabetic keys will generate their shifted character code. The 25th bit in
the PARAMETERS field of Set-up will be used as the shift/caps lock
selector. When selected, this field will display the appropr iate text and
allow the operator to modify the state. The lock mode choice of shift/caps
lock is provided as part of the binary parameter field. The default is
'caps lock' mode.
The display for this Set-up parameter will be the 25th
location in the major field marked 'PARAM SET'. The minor field display
will be
LOCK

MODE

CAPS
SHIFT

6.3.6.7 TAB
POSITION D010
Tab at all times generates the ASCII
horizontal tab code, 09 (hex). I t is not affected by SHIFT, CONTROL, or
CAPS LOCK keys (except in SET-UP mode) •

PC100-B Specification
6.3.6.8 RETURN - POSITION C13 carriage return code, 00 (hex).
CAPS LOCK keys.

Page 74

27-Feb-1984

Return at all times generates the ASCII
It is not affected by SHIFT,CONTROL, or
Note

If NEW-LINE mode is selected, this
will generate a CR LF combination.

6.3.6.9 DELETE - POSITION E13 delete character code, 7F (hex).
CAPS LOCK keys.
6.3.7

key

Delete at all times generates the ASCII
It is not affected by SHIFT, CONTROL, or

Alpha and Symbol Keys - POSITIONS E00-E12, 001-012, C01-C12,

These are the Standard Keys affected by the SHIFT, B00-B10, CONTROL, and
CAPS LOCK keys, as well as the correspondence/data processing mode.
They
are mapped to match the keycap legends according to the language being
used.
Note
This requires use of the control key for
those 'symbols' that generate control
codes.
Some foreign language keyboards
may also require use of the
'data
processing' keyboard mode (see SETUP) in
order to select the desired 'symbol'.
6.3.8

Keypad Keys - POSITION E20-E23, 020-023, C20-C23, B20-B22, A21-A23

These keys act the same at Level 2 as in a VT102 except for the Enter key
which is not used for pr int functions.
Ei ther character codes or escape
sequences are generated depending on keypad numeric/application mode and
ANSI/VT52 mode.
At Levell these keys are considered as function keys, and
control/shift/caps lock flags are included in the 16-bit code.
6.3.9

Cursor Arrow Keys - POSITION C17, B16-B18

These keys act the same at Level 2 a s in a VT 102.
Escape sequences are
generated depending on cursor key normal/application mode and ANSI/VT52
mode.
At Level 1 these keys are considered as function keys and the
control/shift/caps lock flags are included in the 16-bit code.
6.3.10 Special Function Keys - PRINT SCREEN, BREAK
These keys have a defined function in terminal mode.
6.3.10.1 Print Screen - POSITION G90 - In terminal mode Print Screen causes
the contents of the screen to be sent to the attached printer.
pressing
<Ctrl/Print Screen> causes the terminal to toggle back and forth between
auto print "on" and "off".
This key is used in place of the ENTER key on a
VT102 for printer functions.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 75

6.3.10.2 FLAG FOR PRINT SCREEN KEY - In order to provide MS-DOS and others
a means of detecting the 'print screen' key without using the 16-bit
keyboard interface, a flag bit in location SYS PAR has been defined.
The
ROM code will set this flag when a 'print screen' key is detected in the
process of extracting key data from the key buffer. The O/S or application
is responsible for clearing this bit after it is detected and when the O/S
or application is first started.
The location of SYSPAR is at address
EF00:FFE and the flag bit is bit 7.
6.3.10.3 PRINT SCREEN ESCAPE SEQUENCE - The escape sequence ESC [ 1 2 - has
been assigned to the 'print screen' key for use in console mode allowing an
It is the
appl ication to see when this key has been depressed.
application's responsibility to do the printing, the firmware only
indicates the key has been activated.
6.3.10.4 BREAK KEY - POSITION GfB - In terminal mode the Break key acts
just like in a VT102 including Shift-Break for a long break disconnect and
Control-Break for a transmitted answerback message.
In console mode, this key is considered a function key and is available at
Level 1 or as an escape string at level 2.
The control/shift/caps lock
flags are included in the l6-bit code.
The pressing of this key also sets
a flag bit in the SYSPAR location.
6.3.11 Function Keys 016-018

POSITION G02, G0S-G09, G14-G16, G20-G23,

E16-E18,-

These keys are only available in console mode at either Level 1 or Level 2
(as escape sequences).
The control/shift/caps lock flags are included in
the 16-bit level 1 code.
Note
Some of these keys have functions within
Set-Up mode:
Help - position GlS
Next Screen - position 018
Previous Screen - position 017

PC100-B Specification

Page 76

27-Feb-1984

ESCAPE SEQUENCES GENERATED BY FUNCTION KEYS (all final characters
'tilde') •
Name

position

Pr int Screen
F4
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F14
HELP
DO
F17
F18
F19
F20
FIND
INSERT HERE
REMOVE
SELECT
PREV SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN

G@@
G@2
G@5
G@6
G@7
G@8
G@9
G14
G15
G16
G2@
G21
G22
G23
E16
E17
E18
016
017
018

ESC Sequence
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

The keyboard layout of the PCl@0-B is shown below.

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

1 2 1 4 1 7
1 8 1 9
2 13 2 1
2 6 2 8
2 9 3 1
3 2
3 3 3 4 1 2 3 4
5
6

are

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 77
T - - : H'tD

CYRL

SCIUM

C99

SHIfT

C99

899

LOCK

-t"'ln•.-~~~~
PUIT

-r---

ico"pos£ --,---

(

000

coo,

: ,

---rB02

----r8tn

SET-UP

[01

GO'

E02

:
:

G02

i---.-i
C02
: l
~i--££Ol

G03

C01

80'

--S-

i-.---i

:--V-:

002

BREAK

: DOl i - - - . - i
1-,--: -[0'
--r-i
i
,
c03

--.-

co.

80'

, DO' ;~;
:---r-: £os

---,-- ----0-; DOS ; _ _ ;
cos:

: 6

C06;

; 7

:---r--: E06
- y - --H-l 006 1--.-:
BOS

:--0--:

F6
GOS

i---i
f7
G06

;---;

--.--: 007 :!~!,
--.806

'0'

--.C07

B07
.09
, B08

--?B'O

008

COB:

: 9

-:-r.---:

009

: 0

---:---:

:~:

E'O

:
l

010

011

ESCAPE

-,-:]
:

012

Gll

;--.-;

;--.,.-;' E'2

:---:

B.CK
1---1 SPACE
G'2

i---i LIIE
fEED

DELETE:

C'2
811

CHAI

RETURN

e'3

E'3

SELEct

fIND

0'6

£'6

prrr-f

: IIROW :

8'6

Dowl

pity

iNsERT :

ARROW

8'7

C17

SCIEEN
017

[17

RrCRt

NEtT

REMOVE:

A.RROW

SCREEN
0'8

E' 8

020

E20

8' 8

C20

G15

: LOCIt

,---,

: COMPOSE'-'

'_I

-l---i F17
020
f' 8

82'

C2'

,02'

E2'

02'

pFl
.22

B22

C22

EIT£i
A23

C23

022
"nUS
SIG.
023

\_,

Pf2
'2'

1-'

HERE :

PFl
820

flO

C13

n:trr'"T

f'O

e09

- E 11
--.--;:----r--:
[
,
C"

1---1

:-r-:

C09:

'C10

E09

f9
G08

i---r-l

G07

EOB

:--0-:

SHIFT

[07

:--.-:

B09

SCllEtN

:-,--:

:--w-:
- - , - - --r-:
DO'
BOO

'99

GOO

[00

f'9

E22

022

PF'

---'

E23

02]

I fZO
:

PClgg-B Specification
6.4

Page 78

27-Feb-1984

RECEIVED CHARACTER PROCESSING

6.4.1

Received Character processing

VT102 emulation responds to different characters and control sequences so
as to duplicate the response of the VT102. The full description is found in
section 8
(Terminal Control Functions)
of the VT102 Engineering
Specification. A summary follows.
Reception of 8-bit control codes cause the same effect
2-character, 7-bit escape-FE equivalent had been received.

the

Note
Reception of the 'RESET TO INITIAL STATE'
escape sequence (ESC c) will also reset
the
7201
serial
line
controller
effectively disabling
its
interrupt
structure.
This escape sequence should
not be used from wi thin an appl ication
without
restoring
the
interrupt
structure. Normally the operating system
is in control of the interrupts of the
7201 and an application will not know how
to restructure the interrupts.
Note
Some operational capabilities are common
to both terminal and console modes;
others are not. These are noted below in
the following format:
1. Those common to both are marked
BOTH.
2. Differences are marked as either
TERMINAL or CONSOLE.
6.4.2

ANSII Mode Control Functions

BOTH These functions give the terminal its intelligence.
group include:

Examples in this

Cursor functions (Movement, positioning,

2.
3.

Mode setting and resetting
Line and character modes
etc. )

Terminal editing (Insert and delete line and character, etc.)

Terminal identify, test, and status

Terminal
etc. )

characteristics

(Bl ink

(Key

position reporting, etc.)

character,

underline

character,

autorepeat,linefeed/newline

mode,

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 79

CONSOLE MODE No local echo, modem, or pr inter functions in "console" mode.
6.4.3

Operational Variations

Some of the sequences listed in the previous section affect the terminal's
operational mode.
Examples ( incl ude VT52 or ANS I mode, smooth or jump
scroll and the like.
The escape sequence which normally causes a VT102 to execute self-tests are
ignored and the status report always returns a "no problem" status.
6.4.4

Terminal Reports

BOTH The host computer tells the VT102 emulator
cursor position, status, and device attributes.

report

its

current

TERMINAL MODE printer status reports occur only in Terminal Mode.
6.4.5

Terminal Reset

BOTH The terminal also responds to a command from the computer which causes
it to reset to its saved state. This is not the same as a keyboard entered
system reset which returns to the opening menu.
This recalls the NW
set-ups, clears the screen, and homes the cursor only.
6.5

VT102 CONTROL OF ATTACHED DEVICES

TERMINAL MODE VT102 emulation firmware
printer and EIA modem as the VT102.

has

the

same

control

over

the

CONSOLE MODE VT102 emulation firmware does
printer and comm ports or EIA modern lines.

not

have

control

over

the

6.5.1

Modern Control

TERMINAL MODE Terminal Mode has full duplex capabilities:
1.

data leads only

full modern

asymmetrical (requires special cable)

Terminal Mode does not have half duplex capabilities.
CONSOLE MODE In console mode the "appl ication" must control the comm port
hardware directly.

PC100-B Specification
6.5.2

27-Feb-1984

Page 80

Printer Control

BOTH The baud rates available for the pr inter port are more 1 imi ted than
VT102 baud rates.
The available baud rates are: 75, 150, 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600.
TERMINAL MODE VTl02 firmware contains code to control a serially connected
printer in this mode only.
The emulation supports the print screen and
print cursor line commands, auto print mode, and printer control mode.
CONSOLE MODE In Console Mode the printer is only
"application" through direct control of the hardware.
6.6

accessible

OTHER DIFFERENCES TERMINAL VS. CONSOLE MODES

TERMINAL MODE This mode emulates a VT102, where keyboard characters go to
the communication line, and communication line characters go to the
display, plus all the printer support and Set-up and modern control, etc.
Differences from a real VTl02 are due to differences in the keyboard (keys
in different places), different numbers of and different labels for LEOs
and more extensive Set-up information required (option ID' s, volumes of
bell and click, etc.).
Also, no support of HDX modern protocols is
provided.
CONSOLE MODE This mode acts I ike a VTl02 console (without modern control,
local echo, or pr inter por t) to an appl ication, where keyboard characters
go to the application, application characters go to the display, and the
printer 1S under control of the application; the communication port is
under control of the application. However, the VTl02 can still be put into
Set-up mode and have its characteristics changed like a real console.
Because there is no XON/XOFF between the "console VT102" and an
application, both are running on the same CPU and/or in a single threaded
environment. As a result the service routine hangs waiting for buffer space
to become available (emptied by interrupt process) before returning to the
calling routine.
There are two accesss methods:
1.

The "appl ication" accesses the VT102 "console" through the
interface as though it were a serial line controller communicating
over a high speed comm line.

A" sophisticated appl ication" may access the video display RAM
through indirect write of the display/attribute memory.
This
bypasses normal VTl02 rcvd char processing. A" sophisticated user"
also obtains 16-bit coded (level 1) key data to bypass escape
sequence encoding/decoding needs.
Note
Level I and level 2 'character-available'
status are not interchangeable, a level 2
character-available does not imply a
level I character available.

PC199-B Specification

Page 81

27-Feb-1984

Wi thin the VTl02 emulation there
from/to the interface layer.

are

routines

pass

status

and

data

within the VTl02 emulation, interrupts must not be disabled any longer than
459 microsec.
This requires cautions on re-entrancy of routines that are
shared and potential problems of not completing an interrupt handler that
re-enables interrupts and then does not complete before it is called again.
DATA FLOW DIAGRAMS FOR THE DIFFERENT MODES OF OPERATION

'TERMINAL' mode

PRINTER

<--------------all print
functions

bell

KEYBOARD

<-------------------------------------------------)

APPLICATION

DISPLAY

SET-UP PROCESS

Figure 19.

~Termina1'

COMM

or 'Console' Mode 'Off-line'

PRINTER

bell

KEYBOARD

<---------------------------------------------------)

DISPLAY

v
APPLICATION

SET-UP PROCESS

Figure 11. 'Terminal' or 'Console' Mode 'Set-up'

COMM

PC199-B Specification

Page 82

27-Feb-1984

PRINTER

bell

<-------------------------------------KEYBOARD

local

DISPLAY

------->

I echo

I
I

APPLICATION

COMM

SET-UP PROCESS

Figure 12. 'Terminal' Mode 'On Line' No Printer Functions

<-----------------------c
if operator selects
<--------------print screen

PRINTER

it takes precedence
bell

KEYBOARD

<--------------------------------local
------->

DISPLAY

echo

APPLICATION

SET-UP PROCESS

COMM

Figure 13. 'Terminal' Mode 'On Line' In 'Printer Controller'

PC100-B Specification

Page 83

27-Feb-1984

PRINTER

<---------------

bell

KEYBOARD

<--------------------------------------

DISPLAY

------------X blocked
blocked X

I
APPLICATION

SET-UP PROCESS

COMM

Figure 14. 'Terminal' Mode 'On Line' printing From Screen

PRINTER
A

bell

KEYBOARD

<-------- ---------------------------------->

DISPLAY

I
I

I ------------------------------------I ~------------------------------------------------~

V
V

APPLICATION

SET-UP PROCESS

Figure 15. 'Console' Mode

COMM

PC1~~-B

Specification

EXTERNAL INTERACTIONS

7.1

OPERATING SYSTEM

27-Feb-1984

Page 84

VT102 emulation allows access to its subroutines by the operating system.
It does not require operating system services and runs without the use of
disks.
7.2

STACK OVERHEAD

Hardware interrupts and the attendant interrupt handlers impose a stack
overhead on any program running at the time of the interrupt. The interrupt
handlers swap to their own stack as soon as possible to minimize this
overhead. However, it still requires three words due to the interrupt
process itself (CS, IP, FLAGS) and the firmware pushes three 3 more words
before it swaps to its own stack.
Software interrupts do not swap stacks, and the user must provide
sufficient stack space (plus hardware interrupt overhead).
The amount of
stack required is 25 words (plus hardware, total = 31).
7.3

STACK USE BY APPLICATIONS

The firmware hardware interrupt handlers swap stacks, if required, so they
always run on their own stack.
Some of the handlers re-enable interrupts
after this swap, but while still within the interrupt handler, so other
interrupts are not held up.
At the conclusion of the original firmware
interrupt handler the stacks are swapped back to the original. There is a
caution for 'application' interrupt handlers that expect to use the stack
or registers to pass data between their interrupt handler and the main-line
program.
If the application interrupt occurs while still within the
firmware interrupt handler then current stack and registers will not be
preserved for main-line use. Application interrupt handlers must never use
registers to pass data and must guarantee their own private stack if they
are going to pass data on a stack.
8

VT102

8.1

SET-UP

The non-volatile Set-up parameters are different from those in the VT102
due to hardware differences and system requirements.
The non-volatile
Set-up parameters that are the same as the VT102 are:

PC100-B Specification
Minor Field

Page 85

27-Feb-1984
Major Field

Default

header
on line
on line/local mode
80/132 column mode
parameter
80
tab stop bit map
every 8 positions
TABs
scroll - SMOOTH/JUMP
parameter
smooth
parameter
auto repeat - ON/OFF
on
screen background
parameter
dark
- LIGHT/DARK
cursor - UNDERLINE/BLOCK
parameter
block
parameter
off
margin bell - ON/OFF
on
parameter
keyclick - ON/OFF
parameter
ANSI
ANSI/VT52
parameter
on
* auto xon/xoff - ON/OFF
parameter
US
US/UK char set
auto wrap - ON/OFF
parameter
off
parameter
LF
line feed/new line
parameter
* local echo - ON/OFF
off
* print termination
parameter
FF
char - none/FF
* print extent - ALL
parameter
SCREEN/SCROLLING REGION
all
comm stop bits - 1/2
parameter
1
* rcv parity check
parameter
on
- ON/OFF
* break enabled - ON/OFF
parameter
on
* disconnect char enable
parameter
off
- ON/OFF
* disconnect delay
parameter
2 sec
- 60 MS/2 SEC
* auto answerback enabled
parameter
off
- ON/OFF
50/60 hz
parameter
60
comm data/parity bits
modem
7S
comm xmit rate
modem
9600
comm rcv rate
modem
9600
* comm modem line discipline
modem
FDXA
* disconnect char
modem
none
answerback message - UP TO
20 CHAR (PLUS 2 DELIMITERS) answerback
none
printer data/parity bits
printer
8N
printer xmit/rcv rate
printer
4800
Insertion/replacement mode is always saved as replacement mode.
VT102 non-volatile parameters not included in the emulator are:
screen brightness - NO SOFTWARE CONTROL
WPS keyboard - NO KEYBOARD VARIATION FOR THIS
HDX protocol related parameters

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 86

New non-volatile parameters to be added in emulator are:
Minor Field
bell vol ume
keycl ick vol ume
memory size installed
automatic screen blanking
after elapsed time - ON/OFF
scroll rate for smooth scroll
- 3,6,12 LINES/SEC AT
60HZ (slower at 50HZ)
keyboard key assignments (for
foreign language keyboard support)
CORRESPONDENCE/DATA PROCESSING
lock mode - CAPS/SHIFT
keyboard selected - YES/NO
character code mode - DEC-B/7-BIT
auto-boot from drive - ?,A,B,C,D,W

Major Field

Default

misc
misc
fixed header

7 (max)
7 (max)
none

parameter

mise

parameter
parameter
parameter
parameter
auto-boot

correspondence
caps
no
DEC-B
? (none)

Legend

only apply in terminal mode

8.1.1

Set-up Display and Operation

The Set-up displays consist of two major screen areas. One is fixed and
the other variable as a function of what part of Set-up is used.
The fixed
part of the display, called the header, consists of the words shown below.

SSS

EEE

TTTTT

EEE

SSS

XXX

u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
u u

PPP
P P
PPP
P

TO EXIT PRESS" SET-UP"
PRESS "HELP"
TO RESET TYPE <CTRL/SET-UP>
05.03A
12BK

I ON LINE (or LOCAL)
A

reverse video

PCl~~-B

Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 87

Beneath the header is the variable area which is one of eight different
displays called "major fields." On entering the Set-up mode, the tab
settings major field is automatically displayed. There are two types of
major fields.
One type is accessed by stepping through them sequentially
by means of the Next Screen and Previous Screen keys. The other type is
entered directly at any time (almost) by means of the Help key (help field)
and shifted A (answerback field). within some of the major fields are
variable numbers of minor fields, one for each parameter selectable within
that major field. Minor fields are stepped through by means of the left and
right arrow keys.
Except for 'HELP' and 'ANSWERBACK' fields, the following keys always have
the same effect:
SET-UP
CTRL-SET-UP
HELP
NEXT SCREEN
PREV SCREEN
UPPER/LOWER CASE L
UP-ARROW
DOWN-ARROW
SHIFT-S
SHIFT-D
SHIFT-R
SHIFT-A

exit set-up mode
reset system
enter/exit help field
select next major field
select preceeding major field
toggle line/local state
select next higher value
select next lower value
save current set-ups in NVM
set current set-ups to defaults
(does not save)
recall saved set-ups from NVM
enter answerback field

8.1.1.1 HELP Field - The help field is displayed by pressing the Help key.
It is entered at any time except when already in the answerback field.
It
presents a short list of how to access the major sequential fields, minor
fields, and how to change values. The only key honored while in "Help" is
the Help key which causes an exit to the field displayed before entry to
"Help."
8.1.1.2 ANSWERBACK Field - The answerback field is displayed at any time
by pressing and holding the SHIFT key and then pressing the A key.
The
major field heading ANSWERBACK is displayed and beneath it "A =".
The
first character typed (and displayed) is a delimiter.
Up to 2~ characters
can be entered following the delimiter.
The string automatically
terminates after the 2~ characters or before that when a second delimiter
entry is made. Any character can be entered in the answerback str ing,
including NULL, DELETE, or CTRL characters.
Normally non-printing control characters show as their related ASCII
characters in reverse video.
For example, ETX (control C) shows up as a
reverse video C.
Answerback is exited by typing the delimiter character a
second time or by reaching the 2~ character entry 1 imit.
Str ing entry
errors can only be fixed by exiting answerback and re-entering to make a
new string. The string is eliminated by making the first two characters the
same (2 delimiters with nothing between) •
8.1.1.3 TAB SETTINGS Field - The tab setting field is displayed on entry
to Set-Up. It consists of a row of numbers running repetitively from 1
through ~ with alternate groups of l~ shown in reverse video.
The line
above this row of numbers contains a variable number of the letter "T."

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 88

The location of the T symbol signifies that a tab stop is set at that
point. There are 80 or 132 possible tab stops depending on the screen width
setting in effect.
A cursor shows the current active position.
This
cursor moves by means of the left and right arrow keys, Return (to start of
line), Tab (to next "T" location), and the space bar(acts the same as right
arrow). The "T" key (or up or down arrow keys) reverses the tab setting at
the active position.
In addition Ctrl Tab clears all tab stops and SHIFT
TAB sets the default tab stops at every eighth position (beginning with the
ninth position a T is displayed) •
8.1.1.4 PARAMETER MAJOR Field - The parameter major field displays all the
Set-up parameters that have only two possible values (usually on/off). The
parameters are shown as a row of l's and 0's with alternate groups of 4
shown in reverse video.
The current active parameter is shown by a cursor.
This cursor moves left and right by means of the left and right arrow keys,
Return (to start of line) ,Tab, and space bar(acts the same as right arrow).
As the cursor moves to a new position a field is displayed below the line
tha t details the name of the parameter and what the 0 and 1 val ues mean.
The 0 and 1 values are changed by means of the up and down arrow keys. Some
of these parameters have an immediate affect if changed. Others do not take
affect until exiting from Set-up mode. Changing to either 80 or 132 columns
destroys the user's text display (normally it is preserved dur ing Set-up
and restored on exit).
S.1.1.5 MODEM Field - The modem field displays the parameters for the
modem port (communications port). Some of these are only applicable in
n terminal"
mode. Each parameter has a range of possible val ues, and the
field is shown as a list on the display as shown below.
The active
parameter is shown by a reverse video field.

MODEM
SN

DATA/PARITY

-->1 9600 1 XMIT BAUD
9600

RCV BAUD

FDXA

PROTOCOL

---------------- reverse video

The value of the active parameter changes by means of the up and down arrow
keys which cause the parameter to step through its allowable values. The
active parameter selection changes by means of the left and right ·arrow
keys. Which moves the active field up and down the list of parameters.

PC19~-B

Specification

27-Feb-1984

page 89

8.1.1.6 PRINTER Field - The printer field displays the parameters for the
printer port. The active parameter selection and value changes are the same
as for the modem.
8.1.1.7 MISCELLANEOUS Field - The miscellaneous field is used to select
the bell and key cl ick vol urnes and the smooth scroll rate.
The active
parameter selection and value changes are the same as for the modem.
8.1.1.8 Auto-boot Device Selection - The device will be stored in NVM as 1
of 6 different values, nothing selected (shown as '?'), A, B, C, D (for the
4 possible floppy drives), or W (for the winchester disk).
The default is
'nothing selected' The major field heading will be 'AUTO-BOOT '. The minor
field choices will be '?,A,B,C,D,W' which are selected by the up/down arrow
keys.
Example: AUTO-BOOT? = unit (when no device has been chosen)
8.1.1.9 Storing the Set-ups - The current contents of all the Set-Up
fields, including any answerback message, are transfered to non-volatile
storage by Pressing the SHIFT and "s" keys simultaneously (not while in
HELP or ANSW~ERBACK) •
Note
Insertion/replacement mode is always set
to replacement mode before saving is
done.
8.1.1.19 Using Default SElt .. ups - ~U the Set-up fieldS are set to tpeir
respective default cODoitions by pressing the SHIFT and "D" keys
simul taneously (not while in HELP or A~SWERBACK). Defaults are 1 isted in
section 5.1.
Note
This does not enter the defaults into
non-volatile storage (must use "store"),
but it causes the user's text to be
erased from the screen and causes a line
disconnect in "terminal" mode.
8.1.1.11 Recalling
Stored
Parameters
The parameters
stored
in
non-volatile storage are recalled for use by pressing the SHIFT and "R"
keys simultaneously. This also causes the user's text to be erased from the
screen and causes a line disconnect in "terminal" mode.
Stored parameters
are also automatically recalled at power-up, system reset, and reception of
the RIS escape sequence ( ESC c ). RIS will also do a channelteset of the
72rn printer and communications ports destroying the mode and interrupt
structure in use at the time.

PC199-B Specification
8.2

27-Feb-1984

Page 99

RESET TECHNIQUE

within Set-up mode a "reset" key combination (CONTROL SET-UP) causes a jump
to the start of the self-test at a point which allows it to be
distinguished from a power-up.
9

INTERFACE LAYER

Functions provided by the
sophisticated applications.
9.1

firmware

for

use

operating

systems

and

SOFTWARE INTERRUPT TYPE 40 (DECIMAL)

Function code is passed in DI. It is organized as 16 even number values for
ease in using as table offsets to dispatch to service routines.
FUNCTION COPES
HEX

o
2
4
6
8
A
C
E
113
12
14
16
18
lA
lC
IE

CONSOLE OUT
LEVEL 2 CONSOLE IN
LEVEL 2 CONSOLE IN STATUS
LEVEL 1 (16-BIT) CONSOLE IN
DISABLE CURSOR
ENABLE CURSOR
INITIALIZE INTERRUPT VECTORS
RETURN CLOCK RATE
SET LEDs ON KEYBOARD
CLEAR LEDs ON KEYBOARD
SEND DATA TO SCREEN
INIT 72131 TO NVM PARAMETERS
RAW KEYBOARD DATA
RETURN ROM VERSION NUMBER
CHANGE INTERRUPT VECTOR MAP
RING KEYBOARD BELL
Note
Only registers CS: , SS: , and DS: are
preserved. All other general purpose and
segment registers are not preserved.

9.1.1

Console Out
ENTRY

DI = 13
AL
character
characters)

ASCII

(includes

8-bit

multi-national

PC100-B Specification
9.1.2

27-Feb-1984

Page 91

Level 2 Console In
ENTRY DI

EXIT

Level 2 keyboard character if available
returned status

AL
CL

o = no character available
FF
9.1.3

= character is in AL

Level 2 Console In Status
ENTRY 01

EXIT CL

returned status

o = no character available

= character is available
Note
Cannot be used to detect staus of level 1
character available.

9.1.4

Levell Console In
ENTRY DI

ExIT AX
CL

l6-bit level 1 character
returned status

o = no character available

= no character available due to Level 2 sequence not
completed (previous key caused a string of level 2
characters to be generated. Level 2 buffer has not been
emptied of this string yet.)
FF = character is in AX
RULES FOR LEVEL 1 CHARACTERS
1

11 10

\
FUNCTION KEY FLAG
1
This is a function key.
SHIFT FLAG

shift key in effect

_________ CONTROL FLAG
_____________ CAPS LOCK FLAG

control key in effect
1

= caps lock in effect

PCI99-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 92

For non-function keys, the AL = character (including B-bit multi-national
characters). The effect of shift/control/caps lock is already taken into
account.
For function keys, the AH
follows:
KEY CODE HEX
(,J
1
2
3
5
7
9
B
0
F
11
13

15
17
19
IB
10
IF
21
23
25
27
29
2B
20
2F
32
35
3B
3B
3E
41
44
47
4A
40
5(,J
53
56
59
5C
SF
62
65

= flag data and AL = function key code (ASCII) as
KEY
HELP
DO
not used
PRINT SCREEN
F4
F6
F7
FB
F9
FI(,J
F14
F17
FIB
Fl9
F2(,J
FIND
INSERT HERE
REMOVE
SELECT
PREV SCREEN
NEXT SCREEN
UP-ARROW
DOWN-ARROW
RIGHT-ARROW
LEFT-ARROW
KEYPAD (,J
KEYPAD 1
KEYPAD 2
KEYPAD 3
KEYPAD 4
KEYPAD 5
KEYPAD 6
KEYPAD 7·
KEYPAD B
KEYPAD 9
KEYPAD DASH
KEYPAD COMMA
KEYPAD PERIOD
KEYPAD ENTER
KEYPAD PFI
KEYPAD PF2
KEYPAD PF3
KEYPAD PF4
BREAK

(

PC199-B Specification
9.1.5

27-Feb-1984

Page 93

Disable Cursor
ENTRY 01

= 8

EXIT There is no cursor affect on attributes at cursor position. The
cursor does not show on the screen.
Note
The disable and enable cursor functions
are only to be used immediately preceding
and following a function 14 that may
attempt to set the attributes at the
current cursor position. They can be used
to make the cursor 'invisible' while it
is moved around by other escape sequences
or control characters. These functions
must be used in pairs, first disable then
enable.
9.1.6

Enable Cursor
ENTRY 01

EXIT Cursor does affect attributes
shows on the screen.
9.1.7

cursor

position.

The

cursor

use

Initialize Interrupt vectors
ENTRY DI
EXIT

The following
firmware:

interrupt

types

are

modified

for

Type 2

NMI for RAM option parity error

32.
34.
35.
37.
38.
44.

vertical frequency refresh
graphics controller option
OMA controller of extended coroms option
7201 of extended comms option
keyboard 8251
time tick

the

In addition, the extended comms option and graphics option are reset to the
disabled state.
The extended comms option is reset by writing anything to 8088 port 27 hex.
The graphics option is reset by toggling bit 0 of 8088 port 50 hex
high to low to high.

from

PC199-B Specification

Page 94

27-Feb-1984

Return Clock Rate

9.1.8

ENTRY 01

EXIT AL
bit 13

clock rate
13 613 hz
1 513 hz

set Keyboard LEOs

9.1.9

Set and clear LEOs are only for the indicators. They do not cause any
action that may be implied by the label of the LED affected.
Firmware
normally maintains all LEOs in the proper state.
ENTRY 01 = 113
AL = bit pattern of LEOs to turn on
bit set to 1 = LED on

654

WAIT
COMPOSE
CAPS LOCK
HOLD
MUST BE 1
EXIT
9.1.19

LEOs as requested
Clear Keyboard LEOs

ENTRY

12
bit pattern of LEOs to turn off
bit set to 1
LED off

654

IJ IIIJJJJ
, 1

WAIT
COMPOSE
CAPS LOCK
HOLD

MUST BE 1
EXIT LEOs as requested

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 95

9.1.11 Send Data To Screen
ENTRY DI
AX

BX
BL
BH

TRANSFER TYPE
CHARACTERS AND ATTRIBUTES
ATTRIBUTES ONLY
1
2
CHARACTERS ONLY
3 - FFFF = UNDEFINED

START LOCATION IN DISPLAY
LINE NUMBER (1-24)
COLUMN NUMBER (1-132)
Note
Maximum column number is a function of
screen width (80,132) and line width
(single ,double)

NUMBER OF CHARACTERS/ATTRIB TO TRANSFER, IN BYTES
Note
User is responsible for limiting size of
transfer so end-of-line is not exceeded.

OFFEST TO START OF ATTRIBUTES RELATIVE TO USER'S DS:

OFFSET TO START OF CHARACTERS RELATIVE TO USER'S DS:

CHARACTER/ATTRIB SEGMENT COpy OF USER'S DS: USED FOR OFFSETS
PASSED IN DX AND SI.
Note
Characters
and
attributes must
be
relative to same value of DS; this will
not
modify
line
attr ibutes,
only
character attributes.

9.1.12 Init 7291 To NVM Parameters
NVM refers to current contents of the shadow RAM which are displayed in
SET-UP. They are not necessarily the same as the currently saved SET-UP
par ameter s •
ENTRY DI = 16
DL = 0
FUNCTION
1. Does a channel reset on both channels A and B
2.
Sets baud rates for modem and printer ports according to NVM
3. Loads 10 (hex) into write register 2A, and 0 .into write register 2B
4.
Loads write registers 4A,B with X16 clock, parity/stop bits
according to NVM for the port

PC100-B Specification
5.

Page 96

27-Feb-1984

Loads wr i te reg isters 3A,B with number of receive
acco rd i ng to NVM for the por t and enables receive
Loads wr i te reg ister s 5A, B with number of transmit
acco rd i ng to NVM for the por t and enable transmit

data

bits

data

bits

Note
When data/parity is 7M or 7S, the 7201 is
actually set for 8 data bits, no parity.
9.1.13 Raw Keyboard Data
ENTRY DI

= 18

This function is provided for diagnostics to test the keyboard and is only
intended for that purpose.
It is documented here for completeness.
Note
The SHIFT, CAPS LOCK, and CONTROL keys
can only be read in conjunction with
another key by looking at the flag bits
inA H• Th e SET - UP key will no t b e
detectable by a program, but an operator
will see entry into set-up mode on the
display. The HOLD SCREEN key will not be
detectable by a program, but an operator
will see the 'HOLD
SCREEN' LED on the
keyboard light up.
EXIT CL

o no key available
1 key available

AL
key location matrix code as defined in LK201 keyboard
spec i fica t ion
AH = flag bits as for function 6, level 1 console
9.1.14 Return ROM Version Number
This function is provided for those programs that are hardware/ROM version
dependant. It returns an ASCII text string of the form MM.mm<NULL>L<NULL>,
where MM is the major version variation and mm is the minor version
variation, L is the language variation and <NULL> is the ASCII null
character, 00. This is the same format as the 'hardware part' of the
extended console function that returns software and hardware versions. It
may be used by the BIOS to provide the hardware version part of that
function. By creating an 'empty' buffer and requesting this function,
software can tell whether or not this new function (and its companions) is
supported when it does or does not 'fill in' the buffer. Internally the
version number is kept in ROM as two separate str ings that are combined to
produce the final result. ROM 0 contains an ASCII text string. of the form
MM.mm and ROM 1 contains a string of BCD values that are added to the ROM 0
string on a per-character basis to provide the final result. By choosing
the proper characters and values the overall version number can be set to
any desired result.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 97

EXAMPLE:
'0 4 • - 7'
o 1 0 3 -1

ROM 0 ASCII string
ROM 1 BCD str ing

'0 5 • 0 6'

resultant version number

The language variation comes from the keyboard selection stored in NVM. The
language 10 character is the same as used in the 100A ROMs.
It is obtained
by using the keyboard 10, from NVM, code as an index into a list of
characters such that the result is as shown in the following table. If a
keyboard has not been assigned, the default 10 character is lower case x.
Therefore the version number for the base level 1 ROM set, which does not
have keyboard selection implemented as yet, is 04.01x.
Keyboard

10 character

AMERICAN
CANADIAN/FRENCH
UK
FINNISH
SWEDISH
NORWEGIAN
DANISH
SPANISH
GERMAN
SWISS/FRENCH
SWISS/GERMAN
DUTCH
BELGIAN/FLEMISH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
Function Code

A
C
E
F
M
N
0

S
G
K
L
H
B
P
I

Description

1A return

ROM (hardware) version number

ENTRY

01
OX
BP

EXIT

Buffer filled in with version
text string as follows:
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB
DB

lA
address offset of B-byte buffer for returned version
address segment of buffer ( i.e. buffer is at BP:DX)
number

form

ASCII

tens digit of ROM/hardware version number major part
units digit of ROM/hardware version number major
part
period character as separator between parts
tens digit of ROM/hardware version number minor part
units digit of ROM/hardware version number minor
part
NULL separator
character that identifies language variation
NULL terminator

PC199-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 98

9.1.15 Change Interrupt vector Map
The purpose of this function is to re-map the interrupt vectors to another
block of addresses pr imar ily to resolve a confl ict with MS-DOS on vector
usage.
The format is such that it is expandable for the future if any
future hardware allows for selectable vector space.
In this implementation
only 1 other vector block is supported. Also in this implementation, only
16 consecutive vectors are affected.
The format supports future expansion.
Function Code
lC

Oeser iption

Remap interrupt vectors

ENTRY DI = lC
AL = vector number where transfer will begin from if AL = 13,
then beg in from defaul t vector number
AH
vector number where transfer will go to if AH = 13, go to
default vector number
if AX
13, then only initialize default vector space
For current
(decimal)
CX
I f CX

Rainbow

11313,

the

default

vector

number

213

(hex),

number of vectors to be moved

o on entry, exit with no changes made

For current Rainbow 11313, the default number of vectors is 16 (decimal)
For the PCl1313-B board, where this will first be implemented, the only
supported capabilities will be:
Move 16 vectors from default (213 HEX)
AL
13 (or 213 HEX)
AH
A0 (HEX)
CX
16 (decimal)

to A0 (HEX)

Move 16 vectors from A13(HEX) to defaul t
AL
A0 (HEX)
AH
13 (or 213 HEX)
CX
16 (decimal)

(20 HEX)

Note
This will not relocate the time tick
vector at 1013 (decimal), since it is
unique
to CP/M-86/80 BIOS and
the
firmware knows nothing about it, but it
will relocate the time tick at 44
(dec imal) •
EXIT CX = 0 to show successful remapping (this will serve as a quick
check of support that can be used by software)
Requested block of interrupt vectors copied to new location. Old block of
vectors remains unchanged. Firmware interrupt related routines now use new
vector locations for hardware and software interrupts.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 99

9.1.16 Sound The Keyboard Bell
The ringing of the keyboard bell required the user to use the normal
console out data path.
This function is to prov ide the bell function
within the framework of the high performance data path.
Function Code
lE

Description

Ring the keyboard bell

ENTRY 01 = lE
9.1.17 Get/Set The DEC-8/7-bit Character Code Usage Parameter In NVM
The NVM parameter that determines usage of DEC-8 or national replacement
7-bit character codes is able to be read or set by an external user.
Function Code
20H

Description

set/get DEC-8/7-bit character code state

ENTRY 01
AH

20H
1, for get function
0, for set function

for set function
AL

= 0, for DEC-8
1, for 7-bit national replacement character codes

EXIT
for get function
AL

= 0, for DEC-8
1, for 7-bit national replacement character codes

IMAGE OF Za0 RAM SPACE TO BE LOADED

Any routines that must be loaded into the Z80 space for it to run initially
must be put there by the B0B B.
The ROM must contain this code because it
cannot be obtained from the floppy disk until after the floppy handler is
loaded into the ZB0 and the interface to access the loader is also in
place. This initial code must know how to take care of the 'flipped' ZB0
RAM addresses and relocate routines in the proper locations in RAM.

BOOT LOADER TO READ TRACK 0, SECTOR 1 OF FLOPPY

The purpose of the boot loader is to get into memory a minimal routine
which initiates the loading of the overall operating system. The boot
loader accesses any available dr ive as selected by the opera tor from the
opening menu. If an error occurs, an error message is displayed and the
opening menu is re-displayed.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

The boot loader loads 512 bytes from the specified drive, tr.ack 0', sector 1
into the shared RAM beginning at address 1000 (hex) and jumps to it. If the
loaded routine returns an error, the opening menu is re-displayed. The
selected drive is available by examining the Z80drive select port (40 hex)
which did the selection.
The loaded data must be Z80' instructions.
11.1 BOOT PROCESS
The boot process consists of the following steps:
1.

Opera tor selects the dr ive to boot from by me.ans of the menu.

The 8088 passes control to the Z80' routine. The routine attempts to
read track 0, sector 1 of the selected dr ive into address 1000
(hex) •

While the Z80' is attempting to read, the 8088 counts time
monitors a semaphore location at 0:FFF (initially set to 0').

If the semaphore does not change from 0 within approximately 10
seconds, there is some sort of major problem. The Z80 is stopped
and the Z80 response failure message is displayed along with the
open ing menu. The opera tor may then make a select ion from the menu.

If the Z80 routine detects a 'drive not ready'
condition, it
returns a value of 6 in the semaphore location. The 8088 displays
the message 'Failure, drive not ready, consult your user guide' and
redisplays the opening menu.
A 'drive not ready' is caused when
either a drive door is opened, no disk is in the drive, or when
there is no drive in the system.

If the Z80 detects an error read ing track 0, sector 1 of the
selected drive due to a seek or CRC error, it retries up to two
more times. If all three attempts fail, the Z80 returns the value 2
in the semaphore location.
The 80'88 displays the message ' Failure,
boot loader, consult your user guide' and redisplays the opening
menu.

If the Z80 successfully reads track 0, sector 1 of the selected
drive, it checks the contents of address 1000 (hex).
If this is
not the Z80 code for disable interrupts (F3), the Z80' returns the
val ue 4 in· the semaphore location.
The 8088 displays the message
'Fa i1 ure, non-system disk, consult your user guide' and redisplays
the. open ing menu.

and

Note
This requires the Z80 code resident in
track 0, sector 1 to beg in wi th a '01'
instruction.
11.1.1 If the Z80 successfully reads track 9,; sector 1 of.the selected
dr ive into address 10130 (hex), and the ·first byte is the '01' instruction,
control transfers to this secondary boot by jumping to address 1000 (heX).

27-Feb-1984

PC199-B Specification

page 191

Note
The secondary boot is Z80 code.
11.1. 2 The secondary boot is responsible for load ing the remainder of the
system.
11.1.3 If the loading process fails, control returns to the 8088 by placing
the value 8 in the semaphore location. The 8088 displays the message
"Failure, system loader, consult your user guide', halts the Z80, reloads
the boot reading routine, and redisplays the opening menu.
11.1.4 When the loading process completes successfully, control passes to
the 8088 by placing the value A (hex) in the semaphore location.
The 8088
passes control to the loaded system by doing an indi.rect, intersegment, far
jump via 0:FFB.
Note
The contents of four bytes, starting at
0:FFB, must be pre-loaded with the code
segment and an offset of· the 8088
(system) start address:
FFB, FFC contain IP
FFD, FFE contain CS
Note
The selected drive is determined by
reading the Z80 port 40 (hex), masking to
read bits 9 and 1, and the drive selected
is:
Bit 9

Bit 1

Drive
A

11.1. 5 When the menu choice is made, the screen is blanked by means of a
hardware gate. This leaves the menu image still in display RAM, it just
does not show. The loaded program should send escape strings to erase the
screen and home the cursor, then unblank the display by writing an 83 (hex)
to 8~88 port 0A (hex). This port should not be written to at any other time
as it contains other bits which could cause maj or problems if they do not
agree with an internally maintained copy of the port.
The firmware
properly maintains this port at all other times for NVM and Z89 control.

PC100-B Specification

page 102

27-Feb-1984

11.2 SUPPORT BOOT OF THE WINCHESTER DISK
Booting from the Winchester disk will be supported in the Start-up menu.
The selection item, for booting from the winchester disk, will always be
displayed. If the winchester disk is not present, a system message will be
displayed in response to attempting the boot. The boot process will only
consist of reading in the Wini boot block and passing control to the loaded
code. The loaded code is responsible for selecting the partition to use,
etc.
If the Wini option is not present the message 'Drive not ready' will
be displayed. The boot loading process will be similar to that used for the
floppy disk drives. Instead of being Z80 code it will be 8088 code and the
first byte loaded at location l000H must be 90H (8088 NOP) •
Since the 8088 is doing the remainder of the boot process (instead of the
Z80), there is no time-out error detection required. If the 8088 loaded
code goes off into limbo, the only recovery will be to reset the system. If
it goes out in such a way as to prevent keyboard interrupts, the only
recovery will be to cycle the power. The actual boot process consists of
loading track 0, sector 1 from the Wini into address l000H. If this process
fails the error message 'MESSAGE 11, system load incomplete' is displayed.
If the first byte of the loaded code is not 90H, the error message 'MESSAGE
23, non-system diskette' is displayed. If the previous two steps are
completed successfully, the firmware then does a far call to address l001H.
If the loaded code or any code that it loads determines that there is some
problem that requires terminating the process, it may execute a far return
(using the original stack), in which case the firmware will regain control
and the message 'MESSAGE 9, system load incomplete' is displayed and the
opening menu is redisplayed allowing for another attempt or other choices.

MENU SELECTION PROCESS

After initialization and self-test
with a choice of things to do.

(or

reset),

the operator

is presented

VT102 terminal mode - system looks like a VT102 to a host connected
to the communications port.

Boot operating system drive is selectable

read

in and

start the

operating

system,

3. Run more extensive self-tests.
12.1 SUPPORT AUTO-BOOT ON POWER-UP OF A SELECTED DRIVE
The operator will be able specify a specific disk drive to boot from
automatically on power-up. A Set-up field will be defined for selection of
the appropriate boot drive. Automatic booting will occur at power-up and on
system reset if it is selected for in Set-Up. If the boot procedure cannot
be successfully completed the Start-up menu will be displayed. The operator
can select drives A, B, C, D, or the Hard Disk. Only the selected drive
will accessed for the attempted boot. Multiple drives will not be searched.

PC100-B Specification
13

27-Feb-1984

Page 103

SYSTEM PARAMETER INFORMATION

This is a word of data which maintains bit flags which define the system
state. It is used mainly by the firmware, but is defined here for use by
special routines (e.g. 3277 emulator)
that need to know about these
parameters in order to avoid problems.
Location Mnemonic - Syspar
Address - EF00:FFE
Bit Assignments
Bit 0 - Emulator Mode flag
o console mode
1 = terminal mode
Bit 1 - On/Off Line flag
o
On Line
1 = Off Line, Local
Bit 2 - Set-up Mode flag
o normal
1 = in Set-up
Bit 3 - Hold Screen Mode flag
o normal
1 = Hold Screen in effect
Bit 4 - Scroll In Process flag
o normal
1 = smooth scroll in process
Bits 5-6 reserved
Bit 7 - print Screen Key flag
o not pressed
1 = key pressed
Bit 8 - Bundle Card Option present flag
o option present
1 = option not present
Bit 9 - Floppy Controller Board Present flag
o = floppy present
1 = floppy not present
Bit 10 - Graphics Option Present flag
o graphics option present
1 = graphics option not present
Bit 11 - Memory Option Present flag
o PC100-A Style memory option present
1 = PC100-A Style memory option not present
PC100-B Style memory option mayor may
not be present (determined by firmware)
Bits 12 - 15 reserved

PC100-B Specification
14

27-Feb-1984

Page 104

DIAGNOSTIC AND MANUFACTURING SUPPORT

14.1 FIXED ENTRY POINT FOR MANUFACTURING ROM DIAGNOSTICS
A fixed entry point for the external manufacturing ROM diagnostics has been
provided by means of the existing indirection jump table structure. This
guarantees that even though the future location of the ultimate re-entry to
the diagnostic code may be different, by using a fixed location for a JMP
to the final location, the overall resul t is a fixed location for the
external routine to access. The address of this JMP instruction that will
be maintained for all versions of the 100B ROMs is F400:0006. A far jump to
this address will result in a near jump to label JSTSEG2, which is the
desired re-entry to the diagnostics.
14.1.1 Head Load Timing Test
The head load timing diagnostic test is modified for a low limit value of
230 to 475 ms. This is based on measurements of the RX50 and a plus/minus
10% tolerance.
14.1.2 Memory Diagnostic For Option Configurations
The Power-up memory diagnostics test the lower 128KB of memory. The
self-test memory diagnostics test the full memory configuration.
At
power-up, the diagnostics size memory. Memory is sized in 64KB increments.
If the sized memory is identical to the memory size currently saved in NVM,
the sizing terminates normally with no message.
If the sized memory is different from that currently saved in NVM, the NVM
contents will be changed to reflect the new memory size. A message will be
placed on the Start-up menu screen in the upper left hand corner, informing
the user of the new memory size.
The user is not be allowed to explicitly
change the memory size, contained in NVM, by means of set-up.
Set-up
displays the total memory size as part of its fixed header information.
The default memory size is 128KB.
The main Set-Up screen reflects the
system memory size, as determined by start-up sizing code.
14.1.3 Memory Test and Initialize Routines
The memory test is modified to account for 128KB of RAM in the base system
and all the potential memory option sizes. I t will recognize the old RAM
memory options (64 and 192 K) by the 'option present' hardware signal.
The new RAM option is recognized by the presence of actual memory with the
absence of the hardware 'option present' signal.
The RAM initialization to
set the parity is modified to account for the maximum memory configuration.
If the memory si ze found does not agree with the si ze stored in NVM, the
new size will be stored in NVM and a warning message will be displayed as
part of the opening menu.
The message will consist of the following string
with the xxx part filled in with actual total memory size.
New memory si ze = xxxK

PC100-B Specification

Page 105

27-Feb-1984

14.1.4 Set-up Algorithms For New Memory Sizes
The main Set-up screen reflects the amount of memory in the system.
The
field will be informational only.
The user may no longer set the memory
field.
The total memory size is displayed as xxxK on the line between the
version number and the line/local status.
14.1.5 Memory parity option Test
PC100-B memory parity starts at address
parity testing at the l28K address.

l28K.

The

memory

tests

start

14.1.6 Extended Initialization Of Option Memory
Option memory must be wri tten to, to ini tiali ze the par i ty flag for each
byte.
The diagnostics are modified to initialize the extended option
memory.
14.1.7 Staggered Power-Up Of Winchester and RX50
The power-up of the Wini and RX50 will be staggered so the power supply
surge will be within limits.
The Wini will be powered up along with all
the rest of the system.
The RX50 motor-on will not occur until up
approximately 15 seconds later.
14.1.8 Error Message Storage In ROM
The error messages have been modified to reduce the amount of text
required.
Each error message will consist of three parts: a fixed
introductory part (See user's guide - message), a variable message number
to define the specific problem, (nn,), and an optional text string to
provide a general indication if appropriate.
The optional text string
defines the 'field replaceable unit' where the problem is occurring or be a
reminder as in 'interrupts off'.
This approach provides the knowledgeable
user with a reminder and the new user with a reference message number which
he can look up for detailed information on the problem.
The following
error message assignments have been made.
The error numbers are the same
as those used in the foreign language translations of the l00A to maintain
a sense of continuity.
Original English Text
VIDEO
UNSOLICITED INTERRUPTS
INDEX PULSE
MOTOR SPEED
SEEK
READ SECTOR
RESTORE
STEP
SYSTEM LOAD
VIDEO VFR
BOOT LOAD
NOT READY (dur ing sel f- test)

New English Text
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE

l,main board
2,main board
3,drive A (or B as appropriate)
4,drive A ( or B as appropr iate)
5,drive A (or B as appropr iate)
6,drive A ( or B as appropriate)
7,drive A (or B as appropr iate)
8,drive A (or B as appropriate)
9,system load incomplete
10,main board
ll,system load incomplete
l2,drive not ready

PC199-B Specification
Original English Text
KEYBOARD
NVM DATA
INTERRUPTS OFF
VIDEO RAM
Z80CRC
RAM 0-64K
UNSOLICITED INTERRUPTS Z80
NOT READY (during boot)
REMOVE CARD OR DISKETTE
NON-SYSTEM DISKETTE
SET UP DEFAULTS STORED
RAM ARBITRATION
RAM OPTION
RX50 CONTROLLER BOARD
Z80 RESPONSE
ROM CRC, ROM #0
ROM CRC, ROM #1
CONTENTION
MAIN BOARD
PRINTER PORT
KEYBOARD PORT
COMM PORT

27-Feb-1984

Page 196

New English Text
MESSAGE 13,keyboard
MESSAGE l4,main board
MESSAGE l6,interrupts off
MESSAGE l7,main board
MESSAGE l8,main board
MESSAGE 19,main board
MESSAGE 20,main board
MESSAGE 2l,drive not ready
MESSAGE 22,remove card or diskette
MESSAGE 23,non-system diskette
MESSAGE 24,new memory size = xxxK
MESSAGE 25,set up defaults stored
MESSAGE 26,main board
MESSAGE 27,memory board
MESSAGE 28,RX50 controller board
MESSAGE 29,main board
MESSAGE 30,main board
MESSAGE 3l,main board
MESSAGE 33,contention
MESSAGE 40,main board
MESSAGE 50,main board
MESSAGE 60,main board

POWER SUPPLY

The output connector on the power supply is a 13-pin in-line connector with
the following pinout:
1

ACOK

This signal indicates the presenc.e or absence of valid ac
power entering the power supply. When valid ac power is
present, this signal will be high (open circuit) and when the
ac power is lower than the required minimum input voltage,
this signal will be low (short circuit to logic ground) •
Low State (ac power invalid): The voltage level of this
signal is 0.45 volts maximum when sinking 2.0 milliamperes.
High State (ac power valid): The voltage on this signal is
pulled-up by external circuitry. When pulled up to 10.0
volts, the leakage current to logic ground shall be 25
microamperes maximum at the maximum external pull-up voltage
of 10.0 volts.
Transition Times: The rise time (10% to 90%) and fall time
(90% to 10%) shall be 1.0 microsecond maximum.

VBIAS

When the ac input power is within its valid range, this
source has an open circuit voltage of 12.0 volts + 19% and a
source impedance of 470 ohms + 10%. This signal is used for
manufacturing to automate test monitoring via connecting the
LED write signal through a jumper to this pin.

PC190-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 197

Power-Up: During power-up of the power supply, this source
has an open circuit voltage of 8.0 volts minimum at the time
when the dc output voltages start to increase from zero
volts.
Power Down: During power-down of the power supply, the
voltage on this source decreases toward zero. Due to output
loading variations, there is no definable relationship
between the decay of this output and the decay of the dc
output voltages.
Note
This
pin,
on
the
corresponding
motherboard connector,
is
used
for
manufacturing diagnostics purposes.
A
jumper is installed to connect the
motherboard circuitry to this pin, for
the purpose of enabling this feature.
Otherwise this pin appears as an open
c ircui t on the motherboard.
Should the
jumper be installed and the power supply
connected and operated, circuit damage to
the motherboard could result.
3

Key

This pin must be missing on the connectors.

-12V OUT

Maximum Current -12 VDC, 0.0 amperes minimum to 0.35 amperes
maximum
Output 'Voltage variations:
Total Tolerance
+ 7%
Initial Tolerance
+ 3%
Line Regulation
+ 1.5%
Load Regulation
+ 4.0%
5.1 Volt Load Interaction + 3.0%
Temperature Stability
+ 0.05%/C degrees
Long Term Stability
+ 1%/1000 hrs
Ripple and Noise
120 millivolts, peak to peak
Short Circuit Current
3.0 amperes, maximum
Overvoltage protection
Range,Minimum Trip Point -13.0 Volts
Absolute Maximum Output
-15.0 Volts

5,6 +12.2V OUT

Maximum Current
+12 VDC, 0.9 ampere minimum to 6.7 amperes maximum,
steady state
9.5 amperes maximum,
transient(*)
Output voltage Variations
Total Tolerance
+ 6%
Initial Tolerance
+ 2%
Line Regulation
+ 1%
Load Regulation
+ 3%
5.1 Volt Load Interaction + 3%
Temperature Stability
+ 0.05 %/C degrees
Long Term Stability
+ 1%/1000 hrs
Ripple and Noise
75 millivolts, peak to peak

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 108

Overcurrent Trip point

Minimum:
9.5 amperes (*)
Maximum:
11.S amperes
Short Circuit Current
4.0 amperes (maximum)
Overvol tage protection Range: not appl icable

7,8,9

+5.1

10,11,
12,13

V OUT
Maximum Current: +5 VDC 2.5 amperes minimum to 11.S
amperes max imum
Output voltage Variations:
Total Tolerance
+ 6%
Initial Tolerance
+ 2%
Line Regulation
+ 1%
Load Regulation
+ 3%
12.1 Volt Load Interaction + 3%
Temperature Stability
+ 0.0S%/C degrees
Long Term Stability
+ 1%/1000 h
Ripple and Noise
50 millivolts, peak to peak
Overcurrent Trip Point,
minimum: 12.0 amperes
max imum: 14.0 amperes
Short Circuit Current:
Overvol tage protection Range,
Minimum trip point:
Absolute maximum output: Voltage
DC Power Return
Signal Ground

8.0 amperes, maximum
5.80 volts
7.0 volts

(*) - The +12.2 Volt output shall be capable of sourcing 9.S amperes for
a transient of up to 300 mS.
Continuous current draw at this level will
damage the supply.

CONNECTOR OUTPUTS

16.1 VIDEO INTERFACE CONNECTOR
This connector is a IS-pin D-type female connector supplying
signals and power to the PC100-B monitor and keyboard with the
pinout:
pin

Name

1
2
3
4
5,6
7,8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Red Shield
Green Shield
Blue Shield
Mono Sh ield
GND
+12V
Blue
Green
Red
Mono video
Not used
KBD RCV data
KBD TX data

interface
following

Description
Ground connector for red gun shield
Ground connector for green gun shield
Ground connector for bl ue gun shield
Ground connector for monochrome video gun shield
+12V returns
+l2V DC to monitor and keyboard
RS170 "like" composite red gun output
RS170 "like" composi te green gun output
RS170 "like" composite bl ue gun output
RS170 "like" composi te monochrome video output
RS423 serial data from keyboard
RS423 serial data to keyboard

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 109

Note
In a system configuration with a graphics
option and color monitor only, the green
gun of the color monitor would normally
be connected to the monochrome video
output, ra ther than the green v ideo
output.
16.2 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CONNECTOR
pin

Signal Description

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Protective Ground
PROT GND
XMIT DATA
Transmit Data
Receive Data
REC DATA
Request To Send
RTS
Clear To Send
CTS
DSR
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
GND
RLSD
Receive Line Signal Det.
Not Used
N/U
Not Used
N/U
Not Used
N/U
Speed Indicator/Secondary
Receive Line Signal Det.
SI/SRLSD
Not used
Not used
Send Clock
SEND eLK
Not Used
N/U
Receive Clock
REC CLK
Not Used
N/U
Secondary Request To Send SRTS
Data Term inal Ready
DTR
Not Used
N/U
Ring Ind ica tor
RI
SPDSEL
Speed Select
Not Used
N/U
Not Used
N/U

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Mnemonic Direction

16.2.1 Communications Signal Descriptions
Note
The
following
terminology
is
interchangeably
to
describe
communications signals:
Negative voltage
Posi tive Vol tage
1.

used
the

Mark = OFF
Space = ON

protective Ground - This contact is connected to logic and chassis
ground via a wire jumper, W17. This jumper may be cut out if local
conditions require.

PC100-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 110

Signal Ground
This circuit establishes the common ground
reference potential for all interface circuits except protective
ground.

Transmitted Data (output)
Signals on the line represent the
serially encoded characters that are transmitted from the
communications port. This circuit is held in the marking state
during intervals between characters and at all times when no data
is being transmitted.

Receive Data (input)
Signals on this
serially-encoded characters to be received.

Request to Send (output) - Assertion of this signal indicates that
the channel is ready for transmission.

Clear to Send (input) - When this signal is asserted, it indicates
that the modem is ready for transmission.

Data Set Ready (input) - The on condition of DSR indicates that the
modem is in data mode, and that the control signals asserted by the
modem are val id •

Receive Line Signal Detector (input) - Also called Carrier Detect.
The modem asserts this signal ON when the received signal is of
sufficient quality and magnitude.

Data Terminal Ready (output) - This signal is turned ON whenever
the channel is ready for transmission.

circuit

represent

the

10. Ring Indicator (input) - The ON condition indicates that a ringing
signal is being received from the comm line.
11. Speed Indicator (input) - This signal allows some modems to control
channel bit rates.
12. Secondary Receive Line Signal Detect (input) - This circuit is used
in half duplex coded control with reverse channel.
Note
Speed Ind ica tor and Secondary Rece i ve
Line Signal Detect are two different uses
of the same physical line.
13. Speed Select (output) - This signal allows the 8088 to control the
modulation method of the modem to coincide with its selected bit
rate.
14. Secondary Request to Send (output) - This signal is used for HDX
restraint mode and Asymetric FDX Secondary Request to Send.
15. Secondary Clear to Send (input) - In FDX, this signal is the same
as Clear to Send. In Asymetric FDX, it provides the functionality
for the secondary channel.
16. Secondary Transmitted Data (output) - In FDX, this signal is the
same as Transmitted Data, but when operating in Asymetric FDX, it
provides functionality for the secondary channel.

PC100-B Specification

Page 111

27-Feb-1984

17. Send Clock (input) - This is the external transmit clock that is
suppl ied by the modem substi tuted for the communication transmit
clock when the synchronous select bit is set.
18. Receive Clock (input) - This is the external receive clock that is
supplied by the modem substituted for the communication receive
clock when the synchronous select bit is set.
Note
The Communications Interface connector is
configured as Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) •
16.3 PRINTER PORT INTERFACE CONNECTOR
Pin
1
2

3
5
6

7
20

Signal Description
Protective Ground
Receive Data
Transmi t Data
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready
Signal Ground
Data Terminal Ready

Mnemonic

Direction

PROT GND
RXD
TXD
CTS
DSR
GND
DTR

-----Output
Input
Output *
Output *

-----Input

Notes
*This output is always asserted high.
The
Protective
Ground
contact
is
connected to logic and chassis ground via
a wire jumper, W16.
This jumper may be
cut out if local conditions require.
is
The
Printer
Interface connector
configured
as
Data
Communications
Equipment (DCE).

PC1~0~B

Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 112

16.4 FLOPPY INTERFACE CONNECTOR
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
l3

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Signal Description

Mnemonic

Ground
Track greater than 43
Ground
Not Used
Ground
Select 3
Ground
Index
Ground
Select 0
Ground
Select 1
Ground
Select 2
Ground
Motor On
Ground
Direction
Ground
Step
Ground
Write Data
Ground
Write Gate
Ground
Track 00
Ground
Write Protect
Ground
Read Data
Ground
Side Select
Ground
Drive Ready

GND
TG43
GND
N/U
GND
SEL3 L
GND
INDEX L
GND
SEL0 L
GND
SELl L
GND
SEL2 L
GND
MOTOR ON L
GND
DIR L
GND
STEP L
GND
WRT DATA L
GND
WG L
GND
TK00 L
GND
WRT PRT L
GND
RD DATA L
GND
Side OH
GND
READY L

16.4.1 Floppy Signal Descriptions
1.

Select Unit 3 (output, pin 6)
When asserted, this
indicates that the current disk in position 3 is selected.

Index Pulse (input, pin 8) - This input informs the controller when
the index hole is encountered on the diskette.
Minimum pulse width
is 20 microseconds.
Select Unit 2 (output, Pin 14)
When asserted, this signal
indicates that the current disk in position 2 is selected.

signal

Select Unit 1 (output, Pin 12)
When asserted, this
indicates that the current disk in position 1 is selected.

signal

Select Unit 0 (output, Pin 10)
When asserted, this
indicates that the current disk in position 0 is selected.

signal

PCI99-B Specification

27-Feb-1984

Page 113

Motor On (output, pin 16) - When asserted, this signal turns on the
drive's spindle motor.

Stepping Direction Control (output, pin 18) - This direction signal
is an act ive low when stepping the head toward the spindle and
active high when stepping the head away from the spindle.

Step Pulse (output, Pin 20) - This is a 2-microsecond pulse to move
the head one track. The direction of the step is determined by the
direction output.

Write Data (output, Pin 22) - This is a 500 ns pulse generated for
each flux transition.

10. Write Gate (output, Pin 24) - This output
writing is to be performed to the diskette.

is made

valid

before

11. Track 00 (input, pin 26) - When asserted, this signal informs the
controller that the R/W head is positioned over track 0.
12. write Protect (input, Pin 28) - This input is sampled whenever a
write command is received.
When asserted, the command terminates
and sets the write protect status bit in the FDC status register.
13. Read Data (input, pi n 30) - Thi s i s the raw data signal from the
drive.
This signal should be a negative pulse from a minimum of
750 ns to a maximum of 1250 ns for each flux transition.
14. Side Select (output, pin 32) - When high, the outer surface is
selected. At present, only single surface drives are available, so
this pin would always be high.
15. Ready (input, pin 34) - This bit indicates drive readiness and is
sampled for a logic high before a read or write opera"tion.
This
signal means that a disk is in place and the door is closed and
drive selected.
The motor does not have to be on.
17

OPTIONS

The following assemblies shall be also be offered as options to the base
system:
1.

Expansion RX50 consisting of:
a.
b.

RX50 disk drive
Data cable for second disk drive unit.
longer than the standard drive cable.

This

cable

will

Color graphics, including a controller module, and optional color
monitor and cable.

Ex tended communications, giv ing Bi t/Byte/Async
well as a high speed networking capability.

winchester Disk Storage Sub-system (integral to system box)

communications,

PCI90-B Specification
18

page 114

27-Feb-1984

CABLES

The following cables are included with the system:
1.

Monitor cable - transports monochromatic RS-170 "like" video
signals to the monitor and supplies the keyboard interface.
This
cable carries all power and ground to the monitor and keyboard. The
cable runs external to the system.

RX50 cable - is be a 34-pin ribbon cable to supply interface and
ground from the system board to a single RX50 disk drive.

Power harness - carries all DC power to the system board and up to
two disk drive units.

The following cables
non-standard cables.

are

optionally offered

with

the

system.

They

are

RX50 add-on cable - allows an upgrade to a second RX50 disk drive.

Video color cable - allows connection to a color moni tor.
cable suppl ies a keyboard connection to the system.
Used
color graphics option.

This
with

ENVIRONMENTAL

The PC100-B meets the requirements of the DEC STD 102, Class A. The PC100-B
and all peripherals as a part of the system meet the requirements for FCC
Class B emitted radiation and conducted.

RELIABILITY

The PC100-B demonstrates mean time between failures of no less than 2800
hours. This correlates to roughly one year of operation.

PHYSICAL PACKAGING

The outer measurements of the BA25 are 17.5 inches in width, 13.625 inches
in depth, and 6.0 inches height. On the front of the unit is the main power
switch, and a bezel with pop-out plugs for the RX50 disk drive(s). The back
of the uni t suppl ies access for ac power and pr imary circuit selection
switch and circuit breaker, and access to standard and option connectors.
The packaging includes a fan.
The system board is housed in the lower portion of the BA25 and is encased
in sheet metal to minimize RFI problems. Enough space is available to
support another plane of circuit at in the very least 7/8-inch above the
system module.

PC100-B Specification
22

27-Feb-1984

Page 115

VIDEO CHARACTER SET

See Appendix A.
23

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

The PC100-B complies with the following standards:
EL-00119-00

DEC STD 119 - DIGITAL PRODUCT SAFETY

EL-00102-00

DEC STD 102 - ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARD FOR
COMPUTERS AND PERIPHERALS. The PC100-B
will be a Class A product.

EL-00122-00

DEC STD 122 - AC POWER LINE STANDARD

EL-00103-00

DEC STD 103 - ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY (EMC) HARDWARE DESIGN
REQUIREMENTS.
The PC100-B will meet FCC
Class B Level.

EL-00052-01

DEC STD 052-1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR ASYNCHRONOUS, FULL DUPLEX, SERIAL
TERMINALS AND SYSTEM INTERFACES OPERATING
AS DTE'S CONNECTED TO EIA RS-232 OR CCITT
V.28 POINT-TO-POINT MODEMS.

EL-00110-00

DEC STD 110 ESCAPE SEQUENCE STANDARD

EL-00111-00

DEC STD 111 TERMINAL SYNCHRONIZATION
STANDARD

EL-00107-00

DEC STD 107 DIGITAL STANDARD FOR TERMINAL
KEYBOARDS

EL-00l38-00

DEC STD 138 REGISTRY OF CONTROL
FUNCTIONS (proposed)

In addition, the following non-DEC standards have been used in the design
of the PC100:
ANSI X3.16

Character Structure and Character Parity
Sense

ANSI X3.4-l977

USA Standard Code for Information
Interchange (ASCII)

ANSI X3.4l-l974

Code Extension Techniques for Use with
ASCII

ANSI X3.64-l977

Additional Controls for Use with ASCII

PC100-B Specification
23

27-Feb-1984

page 116

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS (continued)
UL-478

Electronic Data-processing units and
Systems

CSA C22.2, No. 54

Canadian Electronic Code, Part II, Safety
Standards for Electrical Equipment

VDE 0871

Limits of Radio Interference from Radio
Frequency Apparatus and Installations

VDE 0875

Regulations for Radio Frequency
Suppression

IEC 485

Safety of Data Processing Equipment

FCC Part 15, Subpart J

Rules and Regulations - Radio

EIA RS170

Electrical Performance Standards Monochrome Television Studio Facilities

CCITT Recommendation

List of Definitions for Interchange
Circuit V.24 Between Data Terminal
Equipment and Data Circuit Terminating
Equipment

CCITT Recommendation

Electrical Characteristic for Unbalanced
V.28 Double-Current Interchange Circuit

RainbowTM 100+/1006
System Specification
QV069-'GZ

READER'S COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please make suggestions for
improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

D First-time computer user
D Experienced computer user
D Application package user
D Programmer
D Other (please specify) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name__________________________________________________________________

Dme'_________________________________________________________________
Organization_________________________________________________
Street~

_________________________________________________________________

City_________________________________________________________
Statet:-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Zip Code
orCount~------------------------------------------------------------__

";Ha Ta~--

---~.--o~ ;oTearo"
~

e re

and

I
I
I
I
I
I

- - - -- - - - -- - - - -- - - - - -

rrnll-------- ~~;; ---i

if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
1
1

I
1

1
I
1

I
1

Do Not Tear -Fold Here and Tape -------------------------------------------

I
_I

lOO+/lOOB
Terminal Emulation Manual

digital equipment corporation

First Printing. June ,1984

© Digital Equipment Corporation 1984. All Rights ReserVed.
, The inforrnationirr thi,s,dOcuml;lflt is subject~o chan!le'without~tice ~ndshould
not be construed
ii'ronimitmertt oy'Qigitat'l;quipmerifqrirpo(!!(jlfn. Digital
Equipment Corporation'assumes 11.0 rcE!,sp~ibili.ty .fO,r any,errOrs that'i'nay ,
appear in this document.',' " <
"
"~,:
':'..

The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may
only be used orcopi6din
aecordalJcewith iheterms of....such license.
.
'-

No responsibility 'is assumed for the use or reliability of,software on equipment
that is not supplied by DIGITAL or its affiliated companies.
CP/M an~ CP/M...,.asare regis!ered tradem~rks of Digital Resejirch Inc.,
CP/M-80 iss 'trademark of Digital Research lnc.
~". ,i
Z80 is a registered trademark of Zilog, Inc.
8088 is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation:

~D~DDmD'·
DEC
DECmate
DECsystem-10
DECSYSTEM-20
DECUS
DECwriter
DIBOL

MASSBUS
PDP

P/OS
Professional
Rainbow
RSTS
RSX

UNIBUS
VAX
VMS

VI
Work Processor

The postage-prepaid READER'S COMMENTS form on the last page of this
document requests the user's critical evaluation to assist us in preparing future
documentation.

Printed in U.S.A.

CONTENTS
PREFACE
CHAPTER 1

TRANSMITTED CHARACTERS

CHAPTER 2

INTRODUCTION • •
STANDARD KEYS • • • •
Cursor Control Keys
Control Character Keys •
FUNCTION KEYS
• • •
Break • • • • • • • •
NUMERIC KEYPAD KEYS
• • •
RECEIVED CHARACTER PROCESSING

APPENDIX A

GENERAL • • • • • • • • • •
• • • • • • 9
RECEIVED CHARACTERS
• • • 9
CONSOLE MODE TABLES
• • • • • • 9
DISPLAY CHARACTERS •
••••••
12
12
CONTROL CHARACTERS • • • • • • • • • • • •
ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES
••••••
13
14
Error Recovery • • • • • •
• • • •
ANSI-Compatible Sequences • • • •
• • • • 17
Set-Up Feature and Mode Selection
• • • • 17
ANSI/VT52 Compatibility
• • • • • • • • • 21
Scrolling • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 21
22
Scrolling Region •
• ••••
Origin • • • • • •
• • ••
22
Cursor Positioning • • • • •
• • •• 23
Columns Per Line •
• • • • • • • •.
25
Auto Wrap •• • •
26
26
Screen Background • • • • • • • • •
27
Line Feed/New Line •
• • • • • •
Keyboard Ac t ion
• • • • 27
28
Auto Repeat
• • • • • • • • • • • •
Local Echo (Keyboard Send-Rec;eive) • • ••
28
Cursor Key Character Selection • • • • •
28
Keypad Character Selection •
• • • • • 29
31
Character Sets and Selection •
36
Character Attributes
• • • •
Tab Stops
• • • • • • • • • • 37
Line Attributes
• • • ••
37
38
Erasing • • • •
• • • • •
Computer Editing
•••••••
• • ••
39
Inserting and Replacing Characters •
39
40
Pr in ting in Te rminal Mode • • • • •
Pr inter Extent in Terminal Mode • • • • • • • 41
Print Te~mination Character in Terminal Mode • 42
Reports . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • 42
Adjustments • • • • • • •
44
44
VT52-Compatible Sequences
Modes •• • • • • • • • •
· . . >. 44
ANSI/VT52 Compatibility
44
45
Cursor Positioning • • • •
46
Keypad Character Selection •
48
Character Sets and Selection
Erasing • • • • • •
• • ••
49
Printing in Terminal Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
,e
.50
51
Reports • • • •
PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

APPENDIX B

GENERAL • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
CONTROL FUNCTIONS (SEQUENCE FORMATS)

iii

• • • • • 1

• • .

• • 1

• • • • • • • • • 2
• • 3
• • • •
• • 5
• • • • • • • • • 5

• • ." •

• • 7

. . . .. . . . 52

GENERAL
Control Functions • • • • • •
Escape and Control Sequences •
Escape Sequence Introducer
Intermediate-Characters • • • • • • • •
Final Character • • • • • •
Control Sequence Format
Control Sequence Introd~cer
Parameter Characters • • •
Intermediate Characters • • • •
Final Character
• • • • •
APPENDIX C
RAINBOW 100 COMPUTER AND VT100 TERMINAL FAMILY
DIFFERENCES

. , . 616561
65

65
65

66
66

66
66
67

APPENDIX D

DEC'S MULTINATIONAL 8-BIT CHARACTER • • • • •
MULTINATIONAL 8-BITCHARACTER CODES • • • •
8-BIT CHARACTER CODES
• • • • • • • • •
Cl CONTROL CODES • • • • • •
• • • • • •
KEYBOARD AND 8-BIT KEY CODES
• • • • • ••
COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES
• • • •
TWO-KEY COMPOSE SEQUENCE··..
••
THREE-KEY COMPOSE SEQUENCE • •
• • • • •
KEYBOARD CONTROL CODE GENERATION
••••
SET-UP PURGING KEYBOARD BUFFER • • • • • • • •
WAIT INDICATOR • • • • • • •
• • • •
KEYBOARD PRINT SCREEN KEY IN TERMINAL MODE •
KEYBOARD HOLD SCREEN KEY • • • • • • • • •
KEYBOARD CURSOR KEY MODES • • • • • • • •
PRINTER CHARACTER SETS IN TERMINAL MODE • • • • •
PRINTING BLOB CHARACTERS IN TERMINAL MODE • • • •
PRINTER PORT DEFAULTS
• '. • • • • • • • • • • • •
PRINT CURSOR LINE OPERATION IN TERMINAL MODE
PRINTER PORT STATUS REQUEST IN TERMINAL MODE •
TERMINAL ID • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
INSERT AND DELETE LINE ESCAPE SEQUENCES
ALTERNATE 'ROM' CHARACTER SETS • • • • • •
ALTERNATE ROM AND LED EscApE SEQUENCES • •
G2 AND G3 CHARACTER SETS • • • • • • • •
ABORTING ESCAPE SEQUENCES BY INTERMEDIATE
CHARACTERS • • • • • • • •
• • • •
INSERT AND REPLACE MODES. • • • • •
•••••
SELFTEST ESCAPE SEQUENCES • • • • • • • • •
RESET TO INITIAL STATE • • • •
• • • • •
VT52 MODE AND ORIGIN MODE
AUTOWRAP MODE • • • • • •
TAB AND AUTO WRAP • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
XON/XOFF PROTOCOL AND BUFFER SIZE IN TERMINAL MODE
FULL DUPLEX COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL IN TERMINAL MODE
HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATION SUPPORT IN TERMINAL MODE
INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE KEYBOARDS

APPENDIX E

COMPOSE SEQUENCES

APPENDIX F

7-BIT/DEC 8-BIT TRANSLATIONS

68
68
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
70
70
71
71
71
71
71
72

72
72
72
72
72

73
73
73
73
73
73
73
74
74
74
74

FIGURES
1

2
3
4
5

Standard Key Codes
Editing and Cursor Keys
Function Keys
•••••
••••
Standard Key Codes
• • • •
LK20l-AE British Keyboard

• • 1
• • 2

. . . . . . . • 525
75

(

6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13
14

15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

·
····
·
·
·
·
······
····
·· ··· ··· ··· ···
·····
·····
·········
····
· · · · · · · ·· ·· · · ·
·· · · ·· · ·· · ·· · · ·
· ····
··

LK201-AA American (English) Keyboard
75
76
LK201-AC Canadian (French) Keyboard
LK201-AD Danish Keyboard
76
LK201-AF Finnish Keyboard
76
77
LK201-AG Austrian/German Keyboard
LK201-AH Dutch Keyboard
77
LK201-AI Ital ian Keyboard
77
LK201-AK Swiss (French) Keyboard
78
LK201-AL Swiss (German) Keyboard
78
78
LK201-AM Swedish Keyboard
LK201-AN Norwegian Keyboard
79
LK201-AP Belg ian/French Keyboard
79
LK201-AT Flemish Keyboard
79
LK201-AS Spanish Keyboard
80
Mapping Keyboard to National Replacement Characters 83
French Canadian Character Set (7-bit)
84
Finish Character Set (7-bi t)
85
French Character Set (7-bit)
86
87
German Character Set (7-bit)
Italian Character Set (7-bi t)
88
Norwegian/Danish Character Set (7-bi t)
89
Spanish Character Set (7-bi t)
90
91
Swedish Character Set (7-bi t)
92
Swiss Character Set (7-bit)
United Kingdom Character Set (7-bit)
93
7-bit/DEC8-bit Translations
94
Dutch Character Set (7-bit)
95

·······
········

· · · · · · ·· ·· · · ·
···········

TABLES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12
13

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

2
·
·
3
···
··
· · · · · · · · · 45
···
. . . · · · · · · · ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· ·· · ·1076
· · · · · · · · · · · 11
12
.....·····
15
··
· · · · · 18
19
· · · · · ·· · · · ·· · · · · · 19
·· ·· · · · ·· · · · · · · 2720
29
30
· · · · · ·· · · ·· ·· ·· ·· · · · · 33
· · · · · 3435
· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 47
49
······
·
·
62
· · · · · · ·· · · ·
63
··
64
81
· · ·· · · · ·· ·· ·· ·· · · · · 82

Rainbow 100 Editing and Cursor Keys
Cursor Control Key Codes
Control Codes Generated
Rainbow 100 Key Changes
Rainbow 100 Function Keys
Keypad Codes
7-bit US/UK ASCII Characters
8-bit Control and Displayable Characters
Control Characters Recognized by Rainbow 100
Computer
Escape and Control Sequences
Set-Up Features and Modes
ANSI-Specified Modes
ANSI-Compatible Private Modes
Permanently Selected Modes
Line Feed/New Line Feature
ANSI Cursor Control Key Codes
ANSI Keypad Codes
7-bit US/UK ASCII Characters
8-bit Control and Displayable Characters
Special Characters and Line Drawing Character Set
VT52 Keypad Codes
Special Characters and Line Drawing Set and VT52
Graphics Mode Comparison
US/UK ASCII Characters
Control and Displayable Characters
Special Characters and Line Drawing Set
Implici t Compose Sequences
Dead Diacritical Keys

(

PREFACE

INTENDED READER

This guide assumes you are an application programmer.
The information in this guide describes escape
used by the Rainbow 1008 terminal emulation.

sequences

and

codes

GUIDE ORGANIZATION

Chapter 1

shows the characters transmitted by each terminal key.

Chapter 2

describes
how
the
terminal
processes
received
characters.
It also describes the use of control
functions.
Control functions control the display,
processing, and transmission of characters received by
the terminal.
The application programmer uses the
chapter when creating applications software for the
terminal.

Appendix A

summarizes the character codes
used to program the terminal.

Appendix 8

describes the ANSI code extension techniques
create escape and control sequences.

Appendix C

describes the differences between
computer and a VTl02 terminal.

Appendix D

contains the international language keyboards

vii

and

control

the

functions
used

Rainbow

100

CHAPTER 1
TRANSMITTED CHARACTERS

INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the characters generated by the Rainbow 100
keyboard.
The keys are divided into four groups: standard keys,
editing and cursor keys, function keys, and numeric keypad keys.
A distinction is also made between console mode and terminal
the Rainbow 100 computer.

mode

STARDARD KEYS
The keyboard generates American Standard Code
for
Information
Interchange (ASCII) characters. The standard keys (Figure 1) generate
lowercase ASCII characters when neither Shift nor Lock is down. These
keys generate uppercase ASCII characters when either Shift or Lock is
down. The Lock key can act as either a 'Caps Lock' or 'Shift Lock',
selectable from SET-UP.

Ctrl

Figure 1:

Standard Key Codes

Editing and Cursor Keys

MR·9589

Figure 2:
Table 1:

Editing and Cursor Keys

Rainbow 100 Editing and Cursor Keys

Key

Characters Generated

Find

ESC

Insert Here

ESC

Remove

ESC

3 -

Select·

ESC

Prev Screen

ESC

Next Screen

ESC

Up Arrow

ESC

Down Arrow

ESC

Right Arrow

ESC

Left Arrow

ESC

Cursor Control Keys
In ANSI mode the cursor keys generate either application or cursor
control sequences. Cursor key mode selects the type of sequence.
The cursor keys generate ANSI cursor commands. The computer selects
both cursor key mode and keypad mode.
See Cursor Key Character
Selection in Chapter 2 for more information.

In VT52 mode, the cursor keys only generate VT52 cursor control
sequences.
Table 2 lists the ANSI and VT52 compatible cursor key
characters.
Table 2:

Cursor Keys

Cursor Control Key Codes

ANSI Mode
Cursor Key
Cursor Key
Mode Reset
Mode Set

VT52 Mode

[
ESC
A
033 l33 101

ESC 0
A
033 117 101

ESC A
033 101

[
ESC
B
033 133 102

ESC 0
B
033 117 102

ESC B
033 102

[
ESC
C
033 l33 103

ESC 0
C
033 117 103

ESC C
033 103

[
ESC
D
033 133 104

ESC 0
D
033 117 104

ESC D
033 104

Control Character Keys
Table 3 lists the control characters generated by the
can generate control characters in two ways.
Table

keyboard.

You

under

Key

•

Hold down Ctrl and press any key in
Pressed column.

the

•

Press any key in Table 3 under the Dedicated Key column.
These dedicated keys generate control characters without the
use of Ctrl.

Different computer systems may use each control character differently.
NOTE
The Rainbow 100 computer generates some
characters
differently
than
previous
terminals. Table 4 lists the changes.

control
DIGITAL

Table 3,

Control Codes Generated

Control
Character

Mnemonic

Transmitted
Code (Octal)

Null
Start of heading
Start of text
End of text
End of transmission
Enquire
Acknowledge
Bell
Back space
Horizontal tabulation
Line Feed
Vertical tabulation
Form feed
Carriage return
Shift out
Shift in
Data link escape
Device control 1
Device control 2
Device control 3
Device control 4
Negative acknowledge
Synchronous idle
End of transmission block
Cancel previous word or character
End of medium
Substitute
Escape
File separator
Group separator
Record separator
Unit separator
Delete
Null
Escape
File Sep
Group Sep
Record Sep
Unit Sep
Delete

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EaT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DCl (XON)
DC2
DC3 (XOFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DEL
NUL
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
DEL

000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
177
000
033
034
035
036
037
177

Key Pressed

Dedicated
Key

Space Bar
A

B
C
D
E
F
G
H

J
K

L
M

Back Space
Tab
Line Feed
Return*

N
0
P
Q

R
S
T
U

V
W

Y
Z
[

·Escape

1
?

Delete
2 . unshifted
3 unshifted
4 unshifted
5 unshifted
6 unshifted
7 unshifted
8 unshifted

*1n numeric keypad mode (application keypad mode off), you can change the Enter
character code with the line feed/new line feature. When off, this feature causes
Enter to generate a single control character (CR, octal 015). When on, this feature
causes Enter to generate two characters (CR, octal 015 and LF, octal 012).

Table 4:

Control Code

VTl02

NUL (octal 000)
RS (0 c tal 036)
US (octal 037)
ESC

Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl

GS
DEL

Space Bar
?
[

Rainbow 100 Key Changes

Previous Terminals

Rainbow 100 Computer

Ctrl @
Ctrl
Ctrl -

Ctrl Space Bar
Ctrl Ctrl ?
Ctrl [
Ctrl /
Ctrl 1

/
1

Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl
Ctrl

2
6
7

3
4
5

FUNCTION KEYS
The function keys (Figure 3) generate characters used by the computer
software or communication system. The following paragraphs describe
the function keys.

Break
In terminal mode this key generates a break defined by the computer
system when the break enable feature is on. This feature does not
affect other key sequences using Break.
Hold down Shift and press Break to generate a long break disconnect.
A long break disconnect usually disconnects the terminal from the
communication line.
Hold down Ctrl and press Break to transmit the answerback message.
console mode this key is not functional.

Figure 3:

Function Keys

W-0095

Table 5:

Rainbow 100 Function Keys

Key

Characters Generated

Print Screen

ESC [ 12 -

ESC [ 14 -

Interrupt

ESC

17 -

Resume

ESC

18 -

Cancel

ESC

19 -

Main Screen

ESC

20 -

Exit

ESC

21 -

(ESC)

ESC

(BS)

(LF)

Addtnl Options

ESC

26 -

Help

ESC

28 -

ESC

29 -

F17

ESC

F18

ESC [ 32 -

F19

ESC [ 33 -

F20

ESC

(
6

NUMERIC KEYPAD KEYS
These keys generate characters selected by the ANSI/VT52 feature and
alternate (application) keypad mode. The computer selects application
keypad mode. See Keypad Character Selection in Chapter 2 for more
information.
In numeric keypad mode, the numeric keypad generates the numeric,
comma, period, and minus sign characters used by the main keyboard.
In application keypad mode, the numeric keypad generates escape
sequences.
Table 6 lists the characters generated by the numeric
keypad.
Table 6:

Keypad Codes

Key

ANSI Mode
Numeric
Application
Keypad Mode
Keypad Mode

o
060

ESC

0
P
033 11 7 160

VT52 Mode

Numeric
Keypad Mode

Application
'Keypad Mode

ESC

060

033 077 160

?
q
033 077 161

1
061

ESC

0
q
033' 117 161

1
060

ESC

2
062

ESC

0
r
033 117 162

2
062

ESC?

3
063

ESC

3
063

ESC?

ESC

3
4

064
5

6
7

0
s
033 117 163

0
t
033 117 164

033 077 162

033 077 163

ESC

064

033 077 164

5
065

ESC

6
066

ESC

t
u

5
065

ESC

066

033 117 166

7
067

ESC

ESC?

033 117 167

067

033 077

167

8
070

ESC

8
070

ESC

9
071

ESC

9
071

ESC

033 117 165

0
0
0

w
x

033 117 170

033 117 171

033 077 165'

033 077 166

033 077 170

033 077 171

Table 6 (Cont.): Keypad Codes
ANSI Mode
Application
Numeric
Keypad Mode
Keypad Mode

VT52 Mode
Numeric
Application
Keypad Mode
Keypad Mode

- (minus)
055

ESC 0
m
033 117 155

- (minus)
055

ESC ?
m
033 077 155*

, (comma)
054

ESC 0
1
033 117 154

, (comma)
054

ESC ?
1
033 077 054*

.(period)
056

ESC 0
n
033 117 156

• (period)
056

ESC ?
n
033 077 156

Enter+

CR or CR LF
015
015 012

ESC 0
M
033 117 115

CR or CR LF
015
015 012

ESC ?
M
033 077 115

PFl

ESC
033

o P
117 120

ESC 0
P
033 117 120

ESC
033

120

ESC P
033 120

ESC
033

o Q
117 121

ESC 0
Q
033 117 121

ESC
033

121

ESC
033

11 7 122

ESC 0
R
033 117 122

ESC
033

122

ESC
033

117 123

ESC 0
S
033 117 123

ESC
033

123

Key

PF2
PF3
PF4

R
S

Q
R

ESC Q
033 121
ESC R
033 122
ESC S
033 123*

*These sequences are not generated by the VT52 terminal.
+In numeric keypad mode (application keypad mode off), you can change
the Enter character code with the line feed/new line feature. When
off, this feature causes Enter to generate a single control character
(CR, octal 015). When on, this feature causes Enter to generate two
characters (CR, octal 015 and LF, octal 012).

CHAPTER 2
RECEIVED CHARACTER PROCESSING

GENERAL
This chapter describes how the Rainbow 100 computer processes received
characters.
There are two types of received characters, display
characters and control functions.
The chapter covers all display
characters and control functions used by the Rainbow 100 computer.

RECEIVED CHARACTERS
The Rainbow 100 computer processes characters according to American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards X3.64-1979, X3.4-1977,
and X3.41-1974. ANSI standard X3.4 defines the American Standard Code
for Information Interchange (ASCII).
Table 7 shows each ASCII
character with its binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal values.
ASCII corresponds to the International Standards Organization (ISO)
Standard 646 and International Telegraph and. Telephone Consultive
Committee (CCITT) Alphabet 5.
The Rainbow 100 computer processes a received character based on
character types defined by ANSI. Position in the ASCII table tells
yo·u whether a character is a control function or display character.
The ASCII table is 8 columns wide and 16 rows long. The control
functions are in columns a and 1.
The display characters are in
columns 2 through 7. In addition to the characters shown in Table 7,
the Rainbow 100 computer displays the 8-bit characters shown in Table
8 and executes the control functions (CI) in columns 8 and 9.

CONSOLE MODE TABLES
In terminal mode, however, it depends on the communication port's
configurations. In order to correctly process the 8-bit characters in
Table 8, you must have the communication port parameter set to 8 data
bits.
If it is set to 7 data bits the high order bit is set to zero
and the character is processed as though in Table 7.

Table 7:

COLUMN

BITS

7-bit US/UK ASCII Characters

a
a

2
I

5
a

0
I
I

b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

NUL

a
a
a

OLE

20
16
10

40
32
20

60
48
30

100
64
40

120
80
50

a a a

SOH

I
I
I

DC1
iXONI

21
17
11

41
33
21

61
49
31

101
65
41

121
81
51

a a

STX

DC2

18
12

42
34
22

62
50
32

102
66
42

122
82
52

a 0

ETX

3
3
3

DC3
iXOFFI

23
19
13

43
35
23

63
51
33

a 1 a 0

EOT

4
4
4

DC4

24
20
14

44
36
24

64
52
34

45
37
25

65
53
35

66
54
36

67
55
37

70
56
38

2
2
2

ENQ

5
5
5

NAK

25
21
15

ACK

6
6
6

SYN

BEL

7
7
7

ETB

27
23
17

10
8
8

CAN

30
24
18

31
25
19

1 0

26
16

~£

46
38
26
47
39
27

(

50
40
28

)

51
41
29

71
57
39

52
42
2A

58
3A

106
70
46

146
102
66

166
118
76

107
71
47

110
72
48

112
74
4A

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

53
43
28

;

73
59
38

14
12
C

34
28
lC

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

1 1

15
13
D

35
29
10

55
45
2D

75
61
3D

16
14
E

17
15
F

NOTE:

57
47
2F

87
57

37
31
1F

127

131
89
59

111
73
49

126

130
88
58

163
115
73

165
117
75

32
26
lA

SUB

143
99
63

145
101
65

12
10
A

162
114
72

98
62

125
85
55

142

161
113
71

105
69
45

1 0

164
116
74

141
97
61

160
112
70

144
100
64

140
96
60

124
84
54

83
53

104
68

123

=
>

67
43

103

11
9
9

ROW

147
103
67

150
104
68

151
105
69

152
106
6A

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

174
124
7C

132
90
5A

[

133
91
58

114
76
4C

134
92
5C

115
77
4D

]

135
93
5D

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

77
63
3F

117
79
4F

113
75
48

·167
119

154
108
6C
155
109
6D

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

77
170
120
78
1'71
121
79
172
122
7A

}

DEL

175
125

7D
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

DEPENDS ON THE CHARACTER SET SELECTED; U.S.-# U.K.- J:

r--- CO CODES--~'I...· - - - - - - - - - ( A S C IGLCODES
I GRAPHICS)----------~·I

KEY
CHARACTER

ESC

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

MR·9593

Table 8:

1
0

0
0

NEL

HTS

200
128
80

220
144
90

201
129
81

221
145
91

202
130
82

222
146
92

203
131
83

223
147
93

204
132

224
148
94

205
133
85

225
149
95

206
134
86

226
150
96

207
135
87

227
151
97

210
136
88

230
152

211
137
89

231
153
99

213
139
8B

232
154
9A

CSI

233
155
98

240
160
AO

242
162
A2

243
163
A3

320
208
DO

301
193
Cl

266
182
86

IE.

306
198
C6

267
183
87

307
199
C7

247
167
A7

251
169
A9
252
170
AA
253
171
A8

271
185
89

272
186
SA

273
187
88

214
140
8C

234
156
9C

254
172
AC

274
188
8e

215
141
80

235
157
90

255
173
AD

275
189
80

SS2

216
142
8E

236
158
9E

256
174
AE

SS3

217
143
8F

237
159
9F

257
175
AF

270
184
88

310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA

313
203
C8

314
204
CC

••

,
I

315

205
CO

206

277
191
8F

••

317
207
CF

362
242
F2

363
243
F3

364
244
F4

o 0

365
245
F5

345
229
E5

326
214
06

•

346
230
E6

366
246
F6

327
215
07

347
231
E7

367
247
F7

330
216
08

350
232
E8

370
248
F8

000

331
217
09

371
249
F9

332
218
OA

352
234
EA

372
250
FA

333
219
08

353
235
E8

373
251
F8

"u"

374
252
FC

o 0

375
253
FO

376
254
FE

1 '0

377
255
FF

1 1

,
A

••

(IJ

,
,

..U
..Y

316

276
190
8E

000

325
213
05

324
212
04

323
211
03

334
220
DC
335
221
DO
336
222
DE

337
223
OF

~
1
GRCODES
C1 CODES-----o·+·o-------(DEC SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS)
r-KEY

,
A

,
I

,I
A

..
I

341
225
El

344
228
E4

246
166
A6

361
241
Fl

304
196
C4
305
197
C5

000

ROW

-..

..A

360
240
FO

343
227
E3

303
195
C3

264
180
B4

J40
224
EO

342
226
E2

302
194
C2

I--

263
179
B3

b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

322
210
02

262
178
B2

BITS
b6

265
181
B5

1
0

321
209
01

f.L

250
168
A8

300
192
CO

COLUMN
b8

1
1

245
165
A5

)(

261
177
Bl

244
164
A4

260
176
BO

15
1

0
1

241
161
Al

212
138
BA

1
0

14
1

0
1

13
1

0
0

11
1

INO

8-bit Control and Displayable Characters

351
233
E9

354
236
EC
355
237
ED

,
0

,0
A

,u
,

..Y

356
238
EE
357
239
EF

·1

CHARACTER~06 OCTAL
IE.

198

DECIMAL

HEX

MR-9594

DISPLAY CHARACTERS
Display characters are received characters displayed on the screen.
The actual character displayed depends on the character set selected.
You select the character set by using control
functions.
See
Character Sets and Selection in this chapter for more information.

CONTROL CHARACTERS
These single-character control functions start, modify, or stop
terminal operations; the control functions are not displayed.
Table 9
defines the control characters recognized by the terminal. All other
control characters are ignored.
Each control character in this chapter has a mnemonic, listed in Table
9. The mnemonic is an abbreviation of the control character name.
Table 9:

Control Characters Recognized by Rainbow 100 Computer

Character

Mnemonic

Octal
Code

Null

NUL

000

Ignored when received
(not stored
in input buffer) and used as a fill
character

Enquire

ENQ

005

Transmits answerback message

Bell

BEL

007

Generates bell tone.

Backspace

010

Moves cursor to the
left
one
character position; if cursor is at
left margin, no action occurs.

Horizontal
tab

011

Moves cursor to next tab stop, or
to right margin if there are no
more tab stops.

Line Feed

012

Causes a line feed or
a
new
operation.
(See
Line Feed/New
Line) •
Also causes printing in
terminal mode only if auto print
operation is selected.

Vertical tab

013

Processed as LF.

Form feed

014

Processed as LF.

Carriage
return

015

Moves cursor
current line.

Shift out

016

Selects Gl character set designated
by a select character set sequence.

Shift in

017

Selects GO character set designated
by a select character set sequence.

Function

left

margin

Table 9 (Cont.): Control Characters Recognized by Rainbow 100 Computer

Character

Mnemonic

Octal
Code

Device
control 1

DCl

021

Processed as XON. DCl causes the
Rainbow 100 computer to resume
(if
XOFF)
previously
stopped
by
in
transmitting characters only
terminal mode.

Device
control 3

DC3

023

Processed as XOFF. DC3 causes the
computer
stop
Rainbow 100
to
transmi tting all characters except
XOFF and XON.

Cancel

CAN

030

If received during an escape or
control
sequence,
cancels
the
sequence and displays substitution
character (cursor).

Substitute

SUB

032

Processed as CAN.

Escape

ESC

033

Processed as
introducer.

Index

IND

204

Processes a LF.

Next 1 ine

NEL

205

Processes a CR LF sequence.

Horizontal

HTS

210

Sets a horizontal tab
current cursor location.

Reverse index

215

Equals a reverse line

feed~

Single shift 2

SS2

216

Selects G2 character
next character only.

Single shift 3

SS3

217

Selects G3 character
next character only.

Control sequence
introducer

CSI

233

Equals an ESC .[.

Function

escape

sequence

the

set

for

the

set

for

the

ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES
Escape and control sequences provide additional control functions not
provided by the single-character controls of the character set. These
multiple-character sequences are not displayed; instead, they control
Rainbow 100 computer operation.
Escape and control sequences are
defined by ANSI X3.41-1977 and X3.64-1979. See Appendix B for more
information about sequences and sequence formats.

The ANSI-compatible control functions in this user guide have a
mnemonic assigned by ANSI.
If the control function is an ANSI private
control function (defined by DIGITAL), the mnemonic begins with DEC.
The escape and control sequences shown here use ASCII characters. You
must type the characters in the sequenc~s exactly as shown
(upper or
lowercase) •
The text provides the octal equivalent of each character
in the sequence as a second reference. See Table 7 for decimal and
hexadec imal rep:resen ta t ions.
The following section groups sequences by software compatibil i ty (ANSI
or VT52)
and function (Table 10). Appendix A summarizes all control
functions.

Error Rec~very
Current standards do not specify the action performed when the
terminal receives a control function with an error. Errors are
incorrect parameters; invalid control functions. The terminal usually
recovers from these errors by performing as much of the function as
possible. The specific error recovery procedures are as follows:
•

Unrecognized control functions are usually ignored.

control functions
(valid control functions not
• Unsupported
listed in this user guide)
are usually ignored, but may
produce unexpected results.
•

If a 7-bit control character from Table 7 is received within a
sequence, the terminal performs the function of the control
character, followed by the function of the sequence.

•

If cancel (CAN, octal 030) or substitute (SUB octal 032)
i~
received during a sequence, the current sequence is aborted.
The terminal displays the substitute character, followed by
characters in the sequence received after CAN or SUB.

•

If an 8-bit control character from Table 8 is received, the
current escape sequence is aborted, and the function of the
character is performed.

•

If an 8-bit displayable character is received from Table 8,
the 8th bit is stripped off and the escape sequence continues
as if the equivalent 7-bit remainder had been received.

Table 10:

Escape and Control Sequences

Ansi-Compatible Sequences
Set-Up Feature and Mode Selection
Set mode (SM) and reset mode (RM)
ANSI/VT52 Compatibility
ANSI/VT52 mode (DECANM)
Scroll ing
Scroll mode (DECSCLM)
Scrolling Region
Set top and bottom margins (DECSTBM)
Origin
Origin mode (DECOM)
Cursor Positioning
. Cursor up (CUU)
Cursor down (CUD)
Cursor forward (CUF)
Cursor backward (CUB)
Cursor position (CUP)
Horizontal and vertical position (HVP)
Index (IND)
Reverse index (RI)
Next 1 ine (NEL)
Save cursor (DECSC)
Restore cursor (DECRC)
Columns Per Line
Column mode (DECCOLM)
Auto Wrap
Auto wrap mode (DECAWM)
Screen Background
Screen mode (DECSCNM)
Line Feed/New Line
Line Feed/New Line mode (LNM)
Keyboard Action
Keyboard action mode (KAM)
Auto Repeat
Auto repeat mode (DECARM)
*Local Echo
Send-receive mode (SRM)
Cursor Key Character Selection
Cursor key mode (DECCKM)
Keypad Character Selection
Numeric keypad (DECKPNM)
Application keypad (DECKPAM)
Character Sets and Selection
Select character set (SCS)
Single shift 2 (SS2)
Single shift 3 (SS3)
Character Attributes
Select graphic rendition (SGR)
Tab Stops
Horizontal tab sets (HTS)
Tabulation clear (TBC)
Line Attributes
Double-height line (DECDHL)
Single-width line (DECSWL)
Double-width line (DECDWL)

Table 10 (Cont.): Escape and Control Sequences

Ansi-Compatible Sequences
Erasing
Delete character (DCH)
Insert line (IL)
Delete 1 ine (DL)
Inserting and Replacing Characters
Insertion-replacement mode (IRM)
*Printing
Media copy (MC)
*Printer Extent
Printer extent mode (DECPEX)
*Print Termination Character
Printer form feed mode (DECPFF)
Reports
Device status report (DSR)
Cursor position report (CPR)
Device attributes (DA)
Identify terminal (DECID)
Reset
Reset to initial state (RIS)
Adjustments
Screen alignment display (DECALN)
Modes
ANSI/VT52 Compatibility
ANSI mode (DECANM)
Cursor Positioning
Cursor up
Cursor down
Cursor right
Cursor left
Cursor to home
Direct cursor address
Reverse line feed
Keypad Character Selection
Application keypad mode
Numeric keypad mode
Character Sets and Selection
Enter graphics mode
Exit graphics mode
Erasing
Erase to end of line
Erase to end of screen
*Printing
Auto print
Print controller
Print cursor line
Print screen
Reports
Identify
*Only in terminal mode.

ANSI-Compatible Sequences
ANSI-compatible sequences meet
ANSI
standards
X3.64-1979
and
X3.41-1974. This section describes the ANSI control functions used by
the terminal. You can select ANSI compatibility from the keyboard in
Set-Up or have the computer use a sequence.
(See VT52-Compatible
Sequences in this chapter) •

Set-Up Feature and Mode Selection - Set-Up features change how the
Rainbow 100 computer operates. You can select these features from the
keyboard or through escape sequences.
Some Set-Up features are modes. A mode affects Rainbow 100 computer
operation.
The Rainbow 100 computer uses the selected mode until you
or an escape sequence changes the selection. Table 11 lists Set-Up
features and modes.
Modes are changed by using set mode (SM) and
reset mode (RM) sequences. Set and reset the terminal modes by using
the following sequences.
NOTE
Ps represents a variable parameter selected from a
list of parameters.
A series of asterisks (***)
represent the parameter in the octal sequence.
The
parameter
is
transmitted
using
decimal
ASCII
characters. When you set several modes with a single
SM
or RM sequence, a semicolon (i, octal 073)
separates parameters.
Set Mode (SM)
ESC [Ps
i •••
;
Ps
h
033 133 *** 073
073 *** 150
Sets one or more modes specified by selective parameters (Ps)
parameter string.

the

Reset Mode (RM)
ESC [Ps
; ••• ; Ps
I
033 133 *** 073 073 *** 154
Resets one or more modes specified by selective parameters (Ps)
parameter string.

in the

Table 11:

Set-Up Features and}1odes.

Set-Up·Featureor
Mode

Change by Escape
Seque.nces

·Chang.e from
Keyboard in
Sect-Up

On/off line**
Columns per line
'!lab stops
Scroll rate

No
Yes (DECCOLM)
Yes (H.TS/TBC)*
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Auto repeat
Screen background
Cursor
Margin. bell volume
Keyclkk volume

Yes .(DECARM)
Yes (DECSCNM)
No
. No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

ANSI/VT52
Auto XON/XOFF**
US/UK character set
Auto Wrap
Line Feed/New Line

Yes (DECANM)
No
Yes .(SCS) *
Yes (DECAWM)
Yes (LNM)

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Local echo*.*
'Pr int termina·tion character**
Printer extent**
One or two stop bits
Receive parity

YeS (SRM)
Yes (DECPFF)
Yes (DECPEX)
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Break enable**
Disconnect character enable**
Disconnect delay**
Auto answerback enable**

No
No
No
No

Yes'
Yes
Yes
Yes

Power
Modem data/parity bits

No
No

Yes
Yes

Transmit speed
Receive speed
Modem control**
Printer data/parity bits

No
No
No
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Transmit/receive speed
Application keypad mode!
numeric keypad mode
Cursor key mode
Origin mode
Insertion-replacement mode
Country/KBD selected
8-bit/7-bit NRC
Lock mode Caps/Shift

Yes (DECKPAM/DECKPNM)*

Yes (DECCKM)
Yes (DECOM)
Yes (IRM)

No
No

hs
hs
hs

~
~

*These features are not changed using the set mode (SM) and reset mode
(RM) sequences.
**Happens only in terminal mode.

Table 12 lists the ANSI-specified modes and their selective parameters
(Ps) •
Table 13 lists the ANSI-compatible private modes and their
selective parameters. When you change ANSI-compatible private modes,
the first character in the parameter string is a question mark (?,
octal 077). All parameters in the sequence are interpreted as ANSI
compatible private parameters.
This chapter explains each mode in
detail and provides the sequences to set and reset each mode.
The following example shows the use of the question mark (used with
ANSI
private
parameters)
and
semicolon
(used with multiple
parameters). The sequence sets both column and scroll modes.
ESC [
?
3
;
4
h
033 133 077 063 073 064 150
Table 14 describes modes specified in ANSI X3.64-1979 that are
permanently set, permanently reset, or not applicable. See the ANSI
standard for more information about these modes.
Table 12:

ANSI-Specified Modes

Name

Mnemonic

Error (ignored)
Keyboard action
Insertion-replacement
Line Feed/New Line

KAM
IRM
LNM

Table 13:
Name
Error (ignored)
Cursor key
ANSI/VT52
Column
Scroll
Screen
Origin
Auto wrap
Auto repeat
Printer form feed*
Printer extent*

Parameter (Ps)

o
2
4

ANSI-Compatible Private Modes
Mnemonic

Parameter (Ps)

DECCKM
DECANM
DECCOLM
DECSCLM
DECSCNM
DECOM
DECAWN
DECARM
DECPFF
DECPEX

o
2
3
4

5
6

7
8

18
19

*Happens only in terminal mode.
NOTE
The application keypad and numeric keypad modes are
selected using dedicated sequences, not set and reset
mode sequences. See Keypad Character Selection in
this chapter for more information.

Table 14:

Permanently Selected Modes

Name

Mnemonic

Selection

Function

Control
representation

CRM

Reset

Rainbow 100 computer performs
control
functions
without
displaying
a
character to
represent
control
function
received.

Editing boundary

EBM

Reset

Characters moved outside the
margins
are lost; terminal
does not perform erasing and
cursor positioning functions
outside the margins.
This
does not affect horizontal and
vertical position
(HVP)
and
cursor
position
(CUP)
sequences.

Erasure

ERM

Set

All characters
be erased.

Format effector
action

FEAM

Reset

Terminal immediately performs
control functions that affect
the screen display.

Format effector
transfer

FETM

N/A

Guarded area
transfer

GATM

N/A

Horizontal
editing

HEM

N/A

Multiple area
transfer

MATM

N/A

Positioning unit

PUM

Reset

Selected area
transfer

SATM

N/A

Status reporting
transfer

SRTM

Reset

Tabulation stop

TTM

N/A

Vertical editing

VEM

N/A

displayed

can

Terminal specifies horizontal
and
vertical
positioning
parameters
in
control
functions
in
units
of
character position.

Terminal
transmits
status
reports by using device status
report (DSR) seq~ences.

ANSI/VT52 Compatibility - The Rainbow 100 computer is compatible with
both ANSI and private DIGITAL standards. Therefore, you can use new
software that meets both ANSI standards and existing software designed
for previous terminals (such as the VT52) •
ANSI-compatible sequences meet
ANSI
standards
X3.64-l979
and
X3.4l-l974. You select ANSI compatibility by using the ANSI/VT52 mode
(DECANM) sequence in VT52 mode. See VT52-Compatible Sequences in this
chapter for details on selecting ANSI sequence compatibility.
In ANSI
mode, the following sequence selects (VT52 mode).
Features and modes selected in ANSI mode are also used in VT52 mode.
However, these features and modes usually cannot change in VT52 mode.
VT52 Mode (DECANM)
ESC [
?
2
1
033 133 077 062 154
In ANSI mode, reset selects VT52 compatibility.
Rainbow
100 computer responds like a VT52
sequences.

In
to

VT52 mode, the
private DIGITAL

Scrolling - Scrolling is the upward or downward movement of existing
lines on the screen. This makes room for more display lines at either
the top or bottom of the scrolling region. There are two methods of
scrolling, jump scroll and smooth scroll.
Select the type of
scrolling by using the following sequences~
NOTE
Op In full-duplex communication, the auto XON/XOFF
Set-Up
feature
prevents
the
loss of received
characters when using smooth scroll. I f auto XON/XOFF
is not used, fill characters are needed.
Scroll Mode (DECSCLM)
ESC [ ? 4 h
033 133 077 064 150
Set selects smooth scroll.

Smooth scroll rate selected in Set-Up.

ESC [
?
4
1
033 133 077 064 154
Reset selects jump scroll. Jump scroll lets the terminal add lines to
the screen as fast as possible.

Scrolling Region - This inclusive region is the area of the screen
defined by top and bottom margins~ The margins determine which screen
lines move during scrolling. Characters added outside the scrolling
region do not cause the screen to scroll. The minimum size of the
scrolling region is two lines. Therefore, the line number of the top
margin must be less than ~he number of the bottom margin. The origin
mode selects line numbers relative to the whole screen or the
scrolling region.
After the margins are selected, the cursor moves to the home position.
The origin mode feature also affects the home position. Select the
top and bottom margins of the scrolling region by using the following
sequence.
NOTES: When you power up or use the system
scrolling region becomes the full screen.

reset

command,

the

Pt and Pb represent variable numeric parameters. The parameters are
decimal numbers transmitted to the terminal as ASCII characters.
Asterisks (***) represent one or more variable numeric parameters in
the octal sequence.
Set Top and Bottom Margins (DECSTBM)
ESC
[ Pt
;
Pb
r
033 133 *** 073 *** 162
Selects top and bottom margins, defining the scrolling region. Pt is
line number of first line in the scrolling region.
Pb is line number
of bottom line. If Pt and Pb are not selected, the complete screen is
used (no margins) •

Origin - This mode determines if the cursor can move outside the
scrolling region (the area between the top and bottom margins). You
can move the cursor outside the margins with the cursor position (CUP)
and horizontal and vertical position (HVP) sequences.
Lines on the screen are numbered according to the location of the home
position. Home position is always line 1, column 1. The cursor moves
to the new home position whenever origin mode is selected.
Select
origin mode by using the following sequences.
NOTE
When you power up or use
origin mode resets.

the

system

reset

command,

Origin Mode (DECOM)
ESC [
?
6
h
033 133 077 066 150
Set selects home position in scrolling region. Line numbers start at
top margin of scrolling region.
The cursor cannot move out of
scrolling region.
ESC
[
?
6
1
033 133 077 066 154

Reset selects home position in upper-left corner of screen.
Line
numbers are independent of the scrolling region (absolute). Use CUP
and HVP sequences to move cursor out of scrolling region.

Cursor Positioning - The cursor indicates the active screen
where the next character will appear.
The cursor moves:
•

position

One column to the right when a character appears

line down after a line feed (LF, octal 012), form feed
• One
(FF, octal 014) or vertical tab (VT, octal 013) (Line feed/new
line may also move the cursor to the left margin).
bottom margin, this causes an upward scroll.
top

If at

the

margin,

•

One line up after a reverse index, if at the
causes a downward scroll.

•

To the left margin after a carriage return (CR, octal 015)

•

One column to the left after a backspace (85, octal 010)

•

To the next tab stop (or right margin if no tabs
after a horizontal tab character (HT, octal all)

•

To the home position when the top and bottom margins of the
scrolling region
(DECST8M)
or origin mode (DECOM) selection
changes.

are

set)

You can also move the cursor by using the following sequences.
NOTE
Pn represents a variable numeric parameter.
The
parameter is a decimal number transmitted to the
terminal by using ASCII characters. If you select no
parameter or 0,
the terminal assumes the parameter
equals 1.
Asterisks
(***)
represent one or more
characters in the octal sequence.
Cursor Up (CUU)
[
Pn
A
033 133 *** 101

ESC

Moves cursor up Pn lines in same column.

Cursor stops at top margin.

Cursor Down (CUD)
[
Pn
B
033 133 *** 102

ESC

Moves cursor down Pn lines in same column.
marg in.

Cursor

stops

bottom

Cursor Forward (CUF)
ESC [ Pn
C
033 133 *** 103
Moves cursor right Pn columns.

Cursor stops at right margin.

Cursor Backward (CUB)
ESC
[ Pn
D
033 133 *** 104
Moves cursor left Pn columns.

Cursor stops at left margin.

Cursor Position (CUP)
ESC [ PI
;
Pc
H
033 133 *** 073 *** 110
Moves cursor to line PI, column Pc.
If PI or Pc are not selected or
selected as 0, the cursor moves to first line or column, respectively.
Origin mode (DECOM) selects line numbering and ability to move cursor
into margins.
NOTE
PI and Pc represent variable numeric parameters.
The
parameter is a decimal number that represents one or
more characters transmitted to the terminal as ASCII
characters.
Asterisks
(***) represent the variable
parameter in the octal sequence.
CUP operates the same as the horizontal
position (HVP) sequence.
Cursor Position (Home)

and

vertical

(CUP)

ESC
[
H
033 133 110
Moves cursor to home position, selected by origin mode (DECOM).
Horizontal and Vertical Position (HVP)
ESC [ PI
; Pc
f
033 133 *** 073 *** 146
Moves cursor to line PI, column Pc.
If PI or Pc are not selected or
selected as 0, the cursor moves to first line or column, respectively.
Origin mode (DECOM) selects line numbering and ability to move the
cursor into margins.
NOTE
HVP operates the same as
sequence.

the

cursor

position

(CUP)

Horizontal and Vertical Position (Home)

(HVP)

ESC [
f
033 133 146
Cursor moves to home position selected by origin mode (DECOM).
Index
ESC D or
033 104

IND
204

Moves cursor down one line in same column.
margin, screen performs a scroll-up.

cursor

bottom

If cursor is at top

margin,

Reverse Index (RI)
ESC M or RI
033 115
215
Moves cursor up one line in same column.
screen performs a scroll-down.
Next Line (NEL)
ESC E or NEL
033 105
205
Moves cursor to first position on next line.
margin, screen performs a scroll-up.

If cursor is

bottom

Save Cursor (DECSC)
ESC 7
033 067
Saves cursor position, character attribute
(graphic
rendition) ,
character set, and origin mode selection.
(See restore cursor.)
Restore Cursor (DECRC)
ESC 8
033 070
Restores previously saved cursor position,
character
attribute
(graphic rendition), character set, and origin mode selection.
If
none were saved, the cursor moves to home position.

Columns Per Line - This mode selects the number of columns in a
display line, 80 or 132.
With either selection, the screen can
display 24 lines. Select the number of columns per line by using the
following sequences.
NOTE
When you change the number of columns per line, the
screen is erased. This also sets the scrolling region
for full screen (24 lines).

Column Mode (DECCOLM)
ESC [
?
3
h
033 133 077 063 150
Set selects 132 columns per line.
ESC [
?
3
1
033 133 077 063 154
Reset selects 80 columns per line.

Auto Wrap - This mode selects where a received character will appear
when the cursor is at the right margin. Select auto wrap by using the
following sequences.
NOTE
Regardless of the auto wrap Set-Up feature selection,
the tab character never moves the cursor to the next
1 ine.
Auto Wrap Mode (DECAWM)
ESC [
?
7
h
033 133 077 067 150
Set selects auto wrap. Any display characters received when cursor is
at right margin appear on next line. The display scrolls up if cursor
is at end of scrolling region.
ESC [
?
7
1
033 133 077 067 154
Reset turns auto wrap off. Display characters received when cursor is
at right margin replace previously displayed character.

Screen Background - This mode selects either light (reverse)
or dark
display background on the screen. Select screen mode by using the
following sequences.
Screen Mode (DECSCNM)
[
ESC
?
5
h
033 133 077 065 150

white

screen

background

with

black

Reset selects normal screen, a
characters.

black

screen

background

with

white

Set selects reverse screen,
characters.
[
ESC
?
5
1
033 133 077 065 154

Line Feed/New Line - This mode selects the control character(s)
transmitted by Return.
Line feed/new line also selects the action
taken by the terminal when receiving line feed,
form feed,
and
vertical
tab.
Table 15 provides a summary of the feature. Select
line feed/new line mode by using the following sequences.
Line Feed/New Line Mode (LNM)
ESC
[
2
0
h
033 133 062 060 150
Set causes a received line feed, form feed, or vertical tab to move
cursor to first column of next line. Return transmits both a carriage
return and line feed. This selection is also called new line option.
ESC
[
2
0
1
033 133 062 060 154
Reset causes a received line feed, form feed, or vertical tab to move
cursor to next line in current column. Return transmits a carriage
return.
Table 15:

Line Feed/New Line Feature

Feature
Selection

Key PressedCharacter Sent

Character Received-Function

Off

Return-CR

CR-Cursor moves to left margin.

Off

Line Feed-LF

LF, FF, VT-Cursor moves to
but stays in same column.

Return-CR LF

CR-cursor moves to left margin.

Line Feed-LF

LF, FF, VT-Cursor moves to left
of next line.

line

margin

Keyboard Action - Keyboard action lets the computer turn the keyboard
on or off.
This mode always resets when you enter Set-Up. Select
keyboard action mode by using the following sequences.
Keyboard Action Mode (KAM)
ESC
[
2
h
033 133 062 150
Set turns off keyboard and turns on the Wait indicator.
ESC
[
2
1
033 133 062 154
Reset turns on keyboard and turns off the Wait indicator.

A key
Auto Repeat - This mode selects automatic key repeating.
pressed for more than one-half second automatically repeats the
transmission of the character.
Key repeating ~oes not affect Set-Up,
Hold Screen, and Ctrl. Select auto repeat mode by using the following
sequences.
Auto Repeat Mode (DECARM)
ESC [
?
8
h
033 133 077 070 150
Set selects auto repeat.
automatically repeats.

A key pressed for more than one-half

second

ESC [
?
8
I
033 133 077 070 154
Reset turns off auto repeat.

Keys do not automatically repeat.

Local Echo (Keyboard Send-Receive) - This mode selects local echo,
only in terminal mode, which causes every character transmitted by the
Rainbow 100 computer to automatically appear
on
the
screen.
Therefore, the host computer does not have to transmit (echo) the
character back to the Rainbow 100 computer for display.
When local
echo is off, the Rainbow 100 computer only transmits characters to the
host computer. The host computer must echo the characters back to the
Rainbow 100 computer for display. Select send-receive mode by using
the following sequences.
Send-Receive Mode (SRM)
ESC
[
I
2
h
033 133 061 062 150
Set turns off local echo.
The Rainbow 100
characters to the host computer, which must
display on screen.

computer transmits
echo characters for

ESC
[
I
2
I
033 133 061 062 154
Reset selects local echo. Characters transmitted to the host computer
automatically appear on the screen.

Cursor Key Character Selection - Cursor key mode selects the set of
characters transmitted by the cursor keys.
See Table 16 for the codes
transmitted by the cursor keys. Select cursor key mode by using the
following sequences.
NOTE
If you power up or use a system reset command, cursor
This mode also resets during a
key mode resets.
communication line connection in all communication
except full-duplex no modem control (FDX A) •

Cursor Key Mode (DECCKM)
ESC

[

033 133 077 061 150

Set selects cursor keys to generate (application) functions.
ESC

[
?
1
I
033 133 077 061 154

Reset selects cursor keys to generate cursor control sequences.
Table 16:

Cursor Key

ANSI Cursor Control Key Codes

Cursor Key Mode
Reset Sends
Cursor Control
Sequence

Cursor Key Mode
Set Generates
Application
Functions

ESC

[

033 l33 101

033 117 101

ESC

[

033 133 102

033 117 102

ESC

[

033 l33 103

033 117 103

ESC

[

033 133 104

033 117 104

Keypad Character Selection - The numeric keypad generates either
numeric characters or control functions. Selecting application or
numeric keypad mode determines the type of characters.
The program
function (PF) keys generate the same characters regardless of the
keypad character selection. See Table 17 for the characters generated
by the keypad.
Select the keypad mode by using the following
sequences.
NOTE
When you power up or use a system reset command, the
terminal selects numeric keypad mode. This mode is
also selected during communication line connections,
except full-duplex no modem control (FDX A) •
Application Keypad Mode (DECKPAM)
ESC

033 075

Selects application keypad mode.

Keypad generates control functions.

Numeric Keypad Mode CDECKPNM)
ESC

033 076

Selects numeric keypad mode. Keypad generates characters that match
the numeric, comma, period, and minus sign keys on main keyboard.
Table 17:

Key
0
1

Numeric Keypad
Mode

Application Keypad
Mode

0
060

ESC

061
2

3
4

5
6
7

ANSI Keypad Codes

033 117 160
0
q
033 117 161

2
062

ESC

3
063

ESC

033 117 162

033 117 163

ESC

064

033 117 164

5
065

ESC

6
066

ESC

067

033 117 165

033 117 166
0
w
033 117 167

8
070

ESC

9
071

ESC

-(minus)

- (minus)

ESC

055

033 117 155

, (comma)

ESC

, (comma)
• (period)

033 117 170
0
Y
033 117 171
m

054

0
1
033 117 154

• (period)

ESC

056

033 117 156

Table 17 (Cont.): ANSI Keypad Codes
Numeric Keypad
Mode

Application Keypad
Mode

Enter*

CR or CR LF
015 015 012

ESC 0
M
033 117 115

PFI

ESC 0
P
033 117 120

PF2

Q
ESC 0
033 117 121

PF3

ESC 0
R
033 117 122

R
ESC 0
033 117 122

PF4

ESC a
S
033 117 122

S
ESC 0
033 117 123

Key

NOTE
In ANSI mode, if the codes are echoed back to the
terminal or i f the terminals is off-line, the last
character of the sequence appears on the screen; for
example, PF4 appears as an nS".
*In numeric keypad mode, Enter generates the same
characters as Return. You can change the Return key
character code with the line feed/new line feature.
When off, this feature cause's the key to generate a
single control character (CR, octal 015).
When on,
this feature causes the key to generate two characters
(CR, octal 015 and LF, octal 0121.

Character Sets and Selection - The Rainbow 100
the characters found in Tables 18 through 20.

computer

can

display

The Rainbow 100 computer can select only one character set at a time.
Therefore, the Rainbow 100 computer uses the following three character
sets, with some characters appearing in more than one set.
The GR
displayable characters found in Table 8 are always available.
United States
United Kingdom
Special characters and line drawing (VT100 compatible)
Tables 18 through 20 show the character sets. The United States and
United
Kingdom
character sets meet the standard of the nISO
interriatiori'al register of character sets ,to be used with escape
sequences." The space (SP) and control characters are the same in all
sets.

The terminal uses two active character sets at anyone time.
The
computer designates these sets as GO and Gl, using the select
character set (SCS) sequence. Then a single control character can
swi tch between sets.
Shift in
(Sr, octal 017)
invokes the GO
character set; shift out (SO, octal 016) invokes the Gl character set.
The designated character sets are active until the terminal receives
another SCS sequence. You can use the SCS sequence as often as needed
to designate GO and Gl.
Designate GO by using the following
sequences.
NOTE
The terminal uses the character set selected in Set-Up
after
all communication line connections, except
full-duplex no modem control (FDX A) •
Select Character Set (SCS)
ESC (
A
033 050 101
Designates the UK character set as GO.
ESC (
B
033 050 102
Designates the US character set as GO.
ESC (
0
033 050 060
Designates the spec ial characters and line drawing
GO.

character

set

character

set

Designate Gl by using the following sequences.
Select Character Set (SCS)
ESC )
A
033 051 101
Designates the UK character set as Gl.
ESC)
B
033 051 102
Designates the US character set as Gl.
ESC)
0
033 051 060
Designates the special characters and line drawing
Gl.

The terminal also has G2 and G3 character sets.
However, these are
always the default (selected in Set-Up) character sets. You select G2
and G3 for only one character at a time. The terminal returns to the
previous character set after displaying a single character. Select G2
and G3 for one character by using the following sequences.

Table 18:

COLUMN

BITS

rROW

b5
b4 b3 b2 bl
0

o 0

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

1 0

ENQ

o 0

ACK

BEL

0
0
0
1
1
1

20
16
10

21
17
11

40
32
20
41
33
21

DC2

22
18
12

DC3
IXOFFI

23
19
13

DC4

24
20
14

NAK

25
21
15

2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7

OLE
DC1
IXONI

SYN
ETB

26
22
16
27
23
17

~£

42
34
22
43
35
23
44
36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27

101
65
41

62
50
32

102
66
42

5
6

70
56
38

9
:

11
9
9

31
25
19

1 0

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
lA

53
43
28

;

54
44
2C

)

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

1 0

14
12
C

34
28
lC

1 1

15
13
0

35
29

16
14
E

17
15
F

NOTE:

36
30
1E
37
31
IF

52
42
2A

55
45
20
56
46
2E
57
47
2F

65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37

63
51
33
64
52
34

(

61
49
31

1 0

CAN

100
64
40

=
>
?

E
F

103
67
43
104
68
44
105
69
45
106
70
46
107
71
47

V
W

125
85
55
126
86
56
127
87
57

111
73
49

131
89
59

112
74
4A

113
75
48

(

114
76
4C

115
77
40

71
57
39

72
58
3A

76
62
3E
77
63
3F

122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54

74
60
3C
75
61
3D

120
80
50
121
81
51

130
88
58

110
72
48

73
59
38

1
1

50
40
28
51
41
29

60
48

0
0

116
78
4E
117
79
4F

]
A

133
91
58
134
92
5C
135
93
50

1
1

,
a
b
C

e
f

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67

160
112
70

161
113
71

162
114
72

163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117
75
166
118
76
167
119
77
17Q
120
78

t
U

150
104
68

151
105
69

152
106
6A

153
107
68

{

173
123
78

174
124
7C

}

175
125
70

132

0
1

10
8
8

30
24
18

0
1

0
0

1-bit US/UK ASCII Characters

1
m

154
108
6C
155
109
60

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

171
121
79
172
122
7A

....
DEL

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

DEPENDS ON THE CHARACTER SET SELECTED; U.S.-# U.K.- £

r-- CO CODES--~oI- · - - - - - - - - - ( A S C IGLCODES
I GRAPHICS)----------loI

KEY
CHARACTER E i l l 3 3 OCTAL
27

DECIMAL

HEX
MR·9593

8~bit

Table 19:

0
0
0

200
128
80

220
144
90

201
129
81

221
145
91

202
130
82

222
146,
92

203
131'
83

223
147
93

IND

204
132;
84

224
148
94

NEL

205
133
85

225
149
95

206
134
86

226
150
96

207
135
87

227
151
97

210
136
8B

230
152
98

HTS

211
137
89

231
153
99

212
138
8A

232
154
9A

213
139
BB

CSI

214
140 '
8C

233
155
9B

240
160
AD

241
161 '
AI'

242
162
A2

243
163
A3

245
165
A5
246
166
A6

263
179
83
264
180
B4

J.l

265
lBl
85

253
171
AB
254
172
AC

234
156
9C

302
194
C2

303
195
C3

..A

304
196
C4

307
199
C7

271
185
B9
272
186
BA
273
187
BB

114

274
188
8C

215
141
80

235
157
90

255
173
AD

SS2

216
142
8E

236
158
9E

256
174
AE

276
190
BE

SS3

217
143
8F

237
159
9F

257
175
AF

277
191
BF"

306
198
C6

320
208
DO

266
182
B6

):(

252
170
AA

300
192
CO

305
197
C5

270
184
B8

250
168
AB
251
169
A9

275
189
BD

,
E
A

..E
,
I

,
I

••
I

310
200
C8
311
201
C9
312
202
CA
313
203
CB
314
204
CC
315
205
CD

340
224
EO

360
240
FO

361
241
Fl

362
242
F2

363
243
F3

364
244
F4

365
245
F5

322
210
02

342
226
, E2

323
211
03

,
,

BITS

b6
b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

341
225
El

-,
,

ROW

'343
227
E3

324
212
04

344
228
E4

325
213
05

345
229
E5

366
246
F6

367
247
F7

III

370
248
F8

371
249
F9

372
250
FA

373
251
FB

o .1

354
236
EC

374
252
FC

355
237
ED

375
253
FD

376
254
FE

377
255
FF

1,1

326
214
06

•

346
230
E6

327
215
07

347
231
E7

(lj

330
216
08

••

,
U

331
217
09

332
218
DA
333
219
DB

••
U

••

316
206
CE
317
207
CF

321
209
01

COLUMN
b8

301
193
Cl

262
17B
B2

267
183
B7

247
167
A7

261
177
Bl

244
164
A4

260
176
BO

1
0

15
1

0
1

0
0

11
1

1
0

Control and Displayable Characters

334
220
DC
335
22L
DO
336
222
DE

.13,

337
223
, OF

350
232
E8
, 351

233
E9

352
234
EA

353
235
EB

,
I

,I
A
I
00

,u
,

356
236
EE
357
239
EF

~'I
GRCODES
~C1 CODES--·+o·>---'------(DEC SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS)-------I·

KEY
CHARACTER~06 OCTAL
.E

19B

DECIMAL

HEX

MR-9594

Special Characters and Line Drawing Character Set

Table 20:

0
0

BITS

000

o 0

NUL

1
1
1

2
2
2

23
19
13

43
35
23

101
65
41

121
81
51

62
50
32

102
66
42

122
82
52

63
51
33

103

123

65
53
35

105
69
45

45
37
25

6
6
6

26
22
16

66
54
36

126

7
7
7

27
23
17

67
55
37

127

BEL

106
70
46
107
71
47

10
8
8

110
72
48

11
9
9

o 0

(XOFF)

CAN

12
10
A

SUB
ESC

3B
26
47
39
27

146
102
66

166
118
76

147

130
88
58

150
104
68

111
73
49

131

151
105
69

112
74
4A

152
106
6A

[

153
107
6B

154
108
6C
155
109
6D

174
124
7C

175
125
7D

32
26
lA

52
42
2A

72
58
3A

33
27
lB

53
43
2B

;

73
59
3B

113

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

75
61
3D

115
77
4D

]

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

57
47
2F

117
79 (BLANK)
4F

o 1

15
13
D

35
29
10

16
14
E

36
30
lE

17
15
F

37
31
IF

44
2C

55
45
2D

63
3F

75
4B

86
56

34
28
lC

114
72

165
117
75

71
57
39

14
12
C

SCAN 7

83
53

162

145
101
65

51
41
29

)

SCAN 5

161
113
71

125
B5

31
25
19

98
62

160
112
70

13
11
8

142

SCAN 3

144
100
64

70
56
38

141
97
61

124
B4
54

50
40
28

,
I

143
99
63

(

o 1 1

•

140
96
60

67
43

30
24
18

42
34
22

o ·0 0

61
49
31

25
21
15

22
18
12

5
5

41
33
21

ENQ

6
120
80
50

104
6B
44

5
100
64
40

21
17
11

64
52
34

60
48
30

DC3

40
32
20

44
36
24

DC1
(XON)

2
20
16
10

1
0

24
20
14

o 0

4
4
4

1
0

3
3
3

0
1

ETX

EOT

1
0

1
0
0
0

0
1

COLUMN

B4 B3 82 Bl ROW

0
0

87
57

89
59
132

90
5A

133
91
5B
134
92
5C
135
93
5D
136
94
5E
137
96
5F

r
L

t
SCAN 1

103
67

SCAN 9

163
115
73
164
116
74

167
119

77
170
120
78
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
7B

156
110
6E

176
126
7E

157
111
6F

177
127
7F

KEY
ASCII CHARACTEREill33 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

MR-9587

Single Shift 2 (SS2)
ESC N or SS2
033 116
216
Selects G2 (default) character set for one character.
in Set-Up.

You

select

Selects G3 (default) character set for one character.
in Set-Up.

You

select

Character Attributes- The terminal can
display
character
attributes that change the character
changing the character.

the
following
display· without

Single Shift 3 (SS3)
ESC 0 or SS3
033 117217

•

Underline

•

Reverse video (character background
background feature)

•

Blink

•

Bold (increased intensity)

•

Any combination . of these attr ibutes (appl ied in the
reception)

opposite

the

screen

order

You can select one or more character attrib~tes at one time.
Selecting an attribute do.es not turn off other attributes already
selected. After you select an attribute, all, characters received by
the terminal appear with that attribute.
If you move the characters
by scrolling, the attribute moves with the characters.
Select the
character attributes by using the following sequences.
Select Graphic Renditi.on (SGR)
ESC [
.. or ESC [
0
m
033 133 155 .
033 133 060. 155
Turns off character attributes.
ESC [
1
m
033 133 061 155
Selects bold (increased intensity).
ESC [
4
m
033 133 064 155
Selects underline.
ESC [
5
m
033 133 064 155
Selects blink.
ESC [
7
II
033 133 065 155
Selects reverse video.
36

Tab Stops - You select tab stop positions on the horizontal l.ines of
the screen. The cursor advances (tabs) to the next tab stop when the
terminal receives a horizontal tab (HT, octal all).
If no tab stops
are set, horizontal tab moves the cursor to the right margin. Set and
clear the tab stops by using the following sequences.
Horizontal Tabulation Set (HTS)
ESC H or HTS
033 110
210
Sets a horizontal tab stop at cursor position.
Tabulation Clear (TBC)
ESC
[
9 or ESC [
0
9
033 133 147
033 133 060 147
Clears a horizontal tab stop at cursor position.
ESC
[
3
9
033 133 063 147
Clears all horizontal tab stops.

Line Attributes - These are display features that affect a complete
display line. The cursor selects the line affected by the attribute.
The cursor stays in the same character position when the attribute
changes.
However,
if the attribute would move the cursor past the
right marg in, the cursor stops at the right marg in.
When you move
lines on the screen by scrolling, the attribute moves with the line.
Select line attributes by using the following sequences.
NOTE
If you erase an entire line by using the erase in
display
(ED)
sequence, the line attribute changes to
single-height and single-width.
Double~.He ight

Line (DECDHL)

Top Half:
ESC t
3
033 043 063

Bottom Half:
ESC t
4
033 043 064

Makes the line with the cursor the top or bottom half of a
double-height, double-width line. Sequences work in pairs on adjacent
lines. The same character must be used on both lines to form full
characters.
If
the line was single-width, single-height, all
characters to the right of center are lost.

Single-Width Line (DECSWL)

t
5
033 043 065

ESC

Makes the line with the cursor single-width, single-height.
line attribute for all new lines on screen.

This

Double-Width Line (DECDWL)

t
6
033 043 066

ESC

Makes the line with the cursor double-width, single-height.
If the
line was single-width, single-height, all characters to the right of
center screen are lost.

Erasing - Erasing removes characters from the screen without affecting
other characters on the screen.
Erased characters are lost. The
cursor position does not change when erasing characters or lines.
sequence, the
If you erase a line by using the erase in display (ED)
line attribute becomes single-height, single-width. If you erase a
line by using the erase in line (EL) sequence, the line attr ibute is
not affected.
Erasing a character also erases any character attribute of
character. Erase characters by using the following sequences.

the

Erase in Line (EL)
ESC

(
K or ESC
(
0
K
033 133 113
033 133 060 113

Erases from cursor to end of line, including cursor position.
ESC

(
1
K
033 133 061 113

Erases from beginning of line to cursor, including cursor position.
ESC

(
2
K
033 133 062 113

Erases complete line.
Erase in Display (ED)
ESC

(
J
or ESC [
0
J
033 133 112
033 133 060 112

Erases from cursor to end of screen, including cursor position.
ESC

[
1
J
033 133 061 112

Erases from beginning of screen to cursor, including cursor position.

ESC

[

033 l33 062 112

Erases complete display.
All lines
single-width. Cursor does not move.

are

erased

and

changed

Computer Editing - Editing allows the computer to insert or delete
characters and lines of characters at the cursor position. The cursor
position does not change when inserting or deleting lines.
Delete
characters
or insert and delete lines by using the following
sequences.
NOTE
Insertion-replacement mode (RM) selects how characters
are added to the screen. See Inserting and Replacing
Characters in this chapter for more information.
Delete Character (DCB)
ESC

[

033 133

*** 120

Deletes Pn characters, starting with character at cursor position.
When a character is deleted, all characters to the right of cursor
move left. This creates a space character at right margin.
This
character has all attributes off.
Insert Line (IL)
ESC

[

033 133

*** 114

Inserts Pn lines at line with cursor. Lines displayed below cursor
move down.
Lines moved past the bottom margin are lost. This
sequence is ignored when cursor is outside scrolling region.
Delete Line (DL)
ESC

[

033 l33

*** 115

Deletes Pn lines starting at line with cursor. As lines are deleted,
lines displayed below cursor move up.
Lines added to bottom of screen
have spaces with same character attributes as last line moved up.
This sequence is ignored when cursor is outside scrolling region.

Inserting and Replacing Characters - The terminal displays received
characters at the cursor; position.
This mode determines how the
terminal adds characters to the screen.
Insert mode displays the
character and moves previously displayed characters to the right.
Replace mode ad~s characters by replacing the character at the cursor
position.
Select insertion-replacement mode by using the following
sequences.

NOTE
This mode resets after a communication line connection
in all communication except full-duplex no modem
control (FOX A).
It also resets any time NVM is
saved.
Insertion-Replacement Mode (IRM)
ESC
[
4
h
033 133 064 150
Set selects insert mode and turns INSERT on. New display characters
move old display characters to the right. Characters moved past the
right margin are lost.
ESC [
4
I
033 133 064 154
Reset selects replace mode and turns INSERT off.
New
characters replace old display characters at cursor position.
character is erased.

display
The old

Printing in Terminal Mode - The Rainbow 100 computer has a serial
printer interface for local printing. The host computer can select
all print operations by using escape sequences. You can only select
two of the print operations from the keyboard, auto print and Print
Screen.
When you print characters from the screen, Rainbow 100 computer
terminal and printer tab stops are ignored. Print char~cters are
spaced with the space (SP, octal 040)
character.
The terminal
transmits a carriage return (CR, octal 015) and line feed (LF, octal
012) after the last printable character of a line - but not a space
character.
A line of double-height characters prints as two identical lines
single-width
characters.
Double-width
characters
print
single-width characters on a single line.

of
as

(MC)

ESC [
?
5
i
033 133 077 065 151
Turns on auto print. A display line prints after you move cursor off
the line, using a line feed,
form feed, or vertical tab (also
transmitted to printer).
The line also prints during an auto wrap.
CR,LF.

Auto wrap lines end with

Media Copy (Auto Print Off)

(MC)

ESC [
?
4
i
033 133 077 064 151
Turns off auto print.
NOTE
Printer controller has a higher priority than auto
print.
Therefore, you can select printer controller
and print characters during auto print.
Media Copy (Printer Controller On)

(MC)

ESC
[
5
i
033 133 065 151
Turns on printer controller.
The terminal
transmits
received
characters to printer without displaying them. The terminal does not
insert or delete spaces, provide line delimiters, or select the
correct printer character set.
Media Copy (Printer Controller Off)

(MC)

ESC
[
4
i
033 133 064 151
Turns off printer controller. Always move printhead
before turning off printer controller.
Media Copy (Print Cursor Line)

left

margin

does

not

change.

(MC)

ESC [
?
1
i
033 133 077 161 151
Prints display line with cursor. Cursor
Print cursor line ends when line prints.
Media Copy (Print Screen)

position

(MC)

ESC [
i or ESC
[
0
i
033 133 151
033 133 060 151
Prints the screen. Printer extent (DECEXT)
selects full screen or
scrolling region to print. Select scrolling region by using set top
and bottom margins (DECSTBM) sequence. Print Screen ends when .screen
prints.

Printer Extent in Terminal Mode- This mode selects the full- screen or
the scrolling region to print during a Print Screen. Select printer
extent mode by using the following sequences.

Printer Extent Mode (DECPEX)
ESC [
?
1
9
h
033 133 077 061 071 150
Set selects the full screen to print during a Print Screen.
ESC [
?
1
9 .1
033 133 077 061 071 154
Reset selects the scrolling region to print during a Print Screen.

Print Termination Character in Terminal Mode - This mode determines if
the terminal should transmit a print termination character after a
Print Screen. The form feed (octal, 014) control character serves as
the print termination character.
Select printer form feed mode by
using the following sequence.
ESC [
?
1
8
h
033 133 077 061 070 150
Set selects form feed as print termination character.
The
transmits this character to printer after each Print Screen.

terminal

ESC [
?
1
8
1
033 133 077 061 070 154
Reset selects no termination character.

Reports - The Rainbow 100 computer transmits reports in response to
escape sequence requests. Reports determine terminal emulation type
and status, and cursor position. The report requests and responses
are as follows.
NOTE
The terminal does not respond to the DSR, DA, or DECID
sequences during printer controller operation.
Device Status Report (DSR)
ESC [
5
n
033 133 065 156
Computer requests a status report (using a DSR sequence) •
ESC
[
0
n
033 133 060 156
Terminal response:

Ready, no malfunctions detected.

These next four codes apply to terminal mode only.
ESC [
?
1
5
n
033 133 077 061 065 156
Computer requests a printer status report. Terminal checks status of
printer. This report should be requested before any print operation.
ESC [
?
1
3
n
033 133 077 061 063 156
Printer not connected to terminal. Data terminal ready (DTR)
of the printer has not been on since terminal turned on.

signal

ESC [
?
lIn
033 133 077 061 061 156
Printer not ready to print.

Printer DTR was on, but is now off.

ESC [
?
IOn
033 133 077 061 060 156
Printer ready to print.

Printer DTR is on.

Cursor Position Report (CPR)
ESC [
6
n
033 133 066 156
Requests a cursor position report.
ESC [ PI
; Pc
R
033 133 *** 073 *** 122
Terminal reports cursor position in response to DSR sequence request
from computer.
PI indicates line and Pc indicates column. No
parameters, or parameters of 0, indicate cursor is at home position.
Origin mode
(DECOM) determines whether line numbering is relative to
the top of the screen or the top of the scrolling region.
Device Attributes (DA)
ESC [
c or ESC [
0
c
033 133 143
033 133 060 143
A request for Rainbow 100 computer identification.
Identify Terminal (DECID)
ESC Z
033 132
A request for Rainbow 100 computer identification.
Rainbow 100
computer uses device attributes
(DA)
to respond. Future DIGITAL
terminals may not support this sequence.
Therefore, new software
should use device attributes.
Device Attributes (DA)
ESC [
?
6
c
033 133 077 066 143
Rainbow 100 response:

nI am a VTI02. n
43

Reset to Initial State(RIS)
ESC c
033 143
Resets the terminal to its initial state.
CAUTION
It is recommended that
unpredictable results.

this

not

uSed

due

Adjustments - The terminal has a screen alignment pattern that lets
Field Service personnel adjust the screen.
Display the screen
alignment pattern by using the following sequence.
Screen Alignment Display (DECALN)
ESC •
8
033 043 070
Fills screen with uppercase E's for screen focus and alignment.
This
command is used by DIGITAL Manufacturing and Field Service personnel.

VT52-Compatible Sequences
VT52-compatible sequences meet private DIGITAL standards.
Therefore,
the terminal can use existing software designed for previous terminals
(such as the VT52).
You can select VT52 compatibility from the
keyboard in Set-Up or the computer can use a sequence.
(See
ANSI~Compatible Sequences in this chapter).
, NOTE
In VT52 mode, a-bit control characters and displayable
characters are processed just as in ANSI mode.

Modes - In VT2 mode, you cannot select most terminal features by,using
sequences.
You can, however, select, the following three modes by
using sequences:
ANSI mode, application keypad mode
on,
and
application keypad mode off (numeric keypad mode on).

ANSI/VT52 Compatibility - The terminal is compatible with both ANSI
and private DIGITAL standards. Therefore, the terminal can use new
software that meets ANSI standards and existing software designed for
previous terminals (such as the VT52). ANSI-compatible sequences meet
standards X3.64-1979 andX3.4l-l974. You use ANSI mode to select most
terminal features1
the terminal uses the same features when it
switches to .VT52 mode. You cannot, ,", however, change most of these
,features in VT52 mode.
Select ANSI compatibility by using the
following sequence.

ANSI Mode (DECANM)
ESC <
033 074
The terminal interprets all sequences according to ANSI standards
X3.64-1979 and X3.41-1974.
The VT52 escape sequences described in
this chapter are not recognized.

Cursor Positioning - The cursor indicates the active screen position
where the next character will appear. You must select the margins for
VT52 mode in ANSI mode. If you do not select marg ins, the terminal
uses the complete screen. The cursor moves:
•

One column to the right when a character appears

•

One line down after a line feed, form feed, or vertical tab
(Line feed/new line may also move the cursor to left margin.)

•

To the left margin after a carriage return

•

One column to the left after a backspace

•

To the next tab stop (or right margin
after a horizontal tab character.

tabs

are

set)

You can also move the cursor by using the following sequences.
Cursor Up
ESC A
033 101
Moves cursor up one line in same column.

Cursor stops at top margin.

Cursor Down
ESC 8
033 102
Moves cursor down one line in same column.
marg in.

Cursor

stops

Cursor Right
ESC C
033 103
Moves cursor one column to right.

Cursor stops at right margin.

Cursor Left
ESC D
033 104
Moves cursor one column to left.

Cursor stops at left margin.

bottom

Cursor to Home
ESC H
033 110
Moves cursor to home position.
Direct Cursor Address
ESC Y line column
033 131 *** ***
Moves cursor to specified line and column. Line and column numbers
are ASCII characters whose codes are their octal value plus octal 037.
For example, line 1 column 8 parameters are octal 040 (first line) and
octal 047 (eighth column) •
Reverse Line Feed
ESC I or RI
033 I I I
215
Moves cursor up one line in same column.
screen performs scroll-down.

If cursor is at top

margin,

Keypad Character Selection - The numeric keypad generates either
numeric characters or control functions.
Select application keypad
mode to generate control functions.
Exit application keypad mode
(select numeric keypad mode)
to generate numeric characters. See
Table 21 for the characters generated by the keypad. Enter and exit
application keypad mode by using the following sequences.
NOTE
When you power up or use a system reset command, the
terminal
exits
application keypad mode
(selects
numeric keypad mode).
This mode is also selected
during
communication
line
connections,
except
full-duplex no modem control (FDX A) •
Enter Application Keypad Mode
ESC =
033 075
Keypad generates sequences used by the application program.
Exit Application Keypad Mode (Numeric Keypad Mode)
ESC >
033 076
Keypad generates characters that match the numeric, comma, period, and
minus sign keys on main keyboard.

Table 21:

VT52 Keypad Codes

Application Keypad
Mode Off (Numeric
Keypad Mode)

Application Keypad
Mode On

0
060

ESC ?
P
033 077 160

1
061

ESC ?
q
033 077 161

2
062

ESC ?
r
033 077 162

3
063

ESC ?
s
033 077 163

4
064

ESC ?
t
033 077 164

5
065

ESC ?
u
033 077 165

6
066

ESC ?
v
033 077 166

7
067

ESC ?
w
033 077 167

8
070

ESC ?
x
033 077 170

9
071

ESC ?
Y
033 077 171

-(minus)

- (minus)

ESC ?
m
033 077 155*

Key

055
, (comma)

, (comma)

054
• (period)

.(period)

056

ESC ?
1
033 077 154*
ESC ?
n
033 077 156

Table 21 (Cont.): VT52 Keypad Codes
Application keypad
Mode Off (Humeric
Keypad Mode)

Applic.ation Keypad
Mdde On

Enter+

CR or CR LF
015
015 012

ESC ?
M
033 077 115

PF1

ESC P
033 120

PF2

ESC Q
033 121

PF3

ESC R
033 122

PF4

ESC S
033 123

ESC S
033 123*

Key

*These sequences are not generated by the VT52.
+In numeric keypad mode, (application keypad mode off),
Enter
generates the same characters as Return. You can change the Return
key character code with the line feed/new line feature.
When off,'
this feature causes the key to generate a single control character
(CR, octal 015). When on, this feature causes the key to generate two
characters (CR, octal 015 and LF, octal 012).

Character Sets and Selection - In VT52 mode, the terminal uses either
the US/UK character set selected in Set-Up or the special characters
and line drawing character set. Tables 18 and 19 show the United
Kingdom and United States character sets. Table 20 shows the special
characters and line drawing character set.
Table 22 compares the
special characters and line drawing character set to VT52 graphics
mode (character set).
Select the character sets by using the
following sequences.
NOTE
The character setsele~ted in Set-Up is used after all
communication line connections, except full-duplex no
modem control (FOX A) •
Enter Graphics Mode
ESC F
033 106
Selects the special characters and line drawing character set.
Exit Graphics Mode
ESC

033 107

Selects the character set selected in Set-Up.

Table 22:

Octal
Code

US or
UK Set

137
140
141

142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176

a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j

k
1
m
n
0

P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
Y

{

}

Special Characters and Line
Graphics Mode Comparison

Special Characters
and Line Drawing Set
Blank
Diamond
Checkerboard
(error ind icator)
Horizontal tab
Form feed
Carriage return
Line feed
Degree symbol
Plus/minus
New line
Vertical tab
Lower-right corner
Upper-right corner
Upper-left corner
Lower-left corner
Crossing lines
Horizontal line - scan 1
Horizontal line - scan 3
Horizontal line - scan 5
Horizontal line - scan 7
Horizontal line - scan 9
Left "T"
Right "T"
Bottom "T"
Top "T"
Vertical bar
Less than or equal to
Greater than or equal to
Pi
Not equal to
UK pound sign
Centered dot

Drawing

Set

and

VT52

VT52 Graphics
Mode (Not
Available in
Rainbow 100 Computer
Blank
Reserved
Solid rectangle

1/
3/
5/
7/
Degrees
Plus or minus
Right arrow
Ell ipsi s (dots)
Divide by
Down arrow
Bar at scan 0
Bar at scan 1
Bar at scan 2
Bar at scan 3
Bar at scan 4
Bar at scan 5
Bar at scan 6
Bar at scan 7
Subscript 0
Subscript 1
Subscript 2
Subscript 3
Subscript 4
Subscript 5
Subscript 6
Subscript 7
Subscript 8
Subscript 9
Paragraph

Erasing - Erasing
removes characters from
the
sc reen.
Erased
characters
are lost.
Erase characters by using the following
sequences.
Erase to End of Line
ESC K
033 113
Erases all characters from cursor to end of
cursor position. Cursor does not move.

current

line,

including

Erase to end of Screen
ESC J
033 112
Erases all characters from cursor to end of screen,
to end of position. Cursor does not move.

including

cursor

Printing in Terminal Mode - The Rainbow 100 computer has a serial
printer interface for local printing.
The host computer can select
all print operations by using sequences.
You can only select two
print operations from the keyboard, auto print and Print Screen.
When you print characters from the screen, terminal and printer tab
stops are ignored. Characters printed are spaced with the space (SP,
octal 040) character. The Rainbow 100 computer transmits a carriage
return and line feed
but not a space character - after the last
printable character of a line.
A line of double-height characters print as two identical lines
single-width
characters.
Double-width
print
characters
single-width characters on a single line.

of
as

Before selecting a print operation, check the printer status by using
the printer status report (DSR) in ANSI mode. Do not select a print
operation if the serial printer is not ready to print.
Select print
operations by using the following sequences.
Auto Print
ESC
033 136
Turns on auto print. A display line prints after you move cursor off
the line, using a line feed,
form feed,
or vertical tab (also
transmitted to printer).
The line also prints during an auto wrap.
CR, LF.

Auto wrap

lines

end

ESC
033 137
Turns off auto print.
NOTE
Printer controller has a higher priority than auto
print.
Therefore, you can select printer controller
and print characters during auto print.

with

Print Controller
ESC W
033 127
Turns on print controller. The terminal transmits received characters
to printer without displaying them. The terminal does not insert or
delete spaces, provide line delimiters, or select printer character
set.

ESC X
033 130
Turns off printer controller. Always move printhead
before turning off printer controller.

left

margin

does

not

change.

Print Cursor Line
ESC V
033 126
Prints display line with cursor. Cursor position
Print cursor line ends when the line prints.

Print Screen
ESC ]
033 135
Prints the screen. Printer extent (DECPEX)
determines whether full
screen or scrolling region prints. Select scrolling region by using
DECSTBM sequence. Print Screen ends when screen prints.

Reports - The Rainbow 100 computer transmits reports in response to
escape sequence report requests. The Rainbow 100 computer generates
only one report in VT52 mode. The report requests and responses are
as follows.
Identify
ESC Z
033 132
This escape sequence requests the Rainbow
itself •

100

computer

ESC /
Z
033 057 132
Rainbow 100 computer responds "I am a VT52." (Same as VT52.)

identify

APPENDIX A

PROGRAMMING SUMMARY

GENERAL
This appendix provides a summary of Rainbow 100
control sequences.

computer

escape

and

Figure 4 shows the codes generated by the standard keys.
Figure 5
shows the control codes generated by the function keys; shaded keys do
not need Ctrl down to generate the control character.

Ctrl

LJ-Olljl

Figure 4:

Standard Key Codes

Programming Sequences
The rest of this appendix repeats the information in summary for ••
Control Charact.ers Received

Name

Character
Mnemonic

Octcll
Code

Null

NUL

000

Ignored when r.eceived (not stored
in input buffer)
and used as a
fill character.

End of
transmission

EOT

004

Can be selected as a disconnect
character.
When
used
as
a
turnaround
character,
the
disconnect character is DLE-EOT.

Function

Name

Character
Mnemonic

Octal
Code

Function

Enquire

ENQ

005

Transmits answerback message.

Bell

BEL

007

Generates bell tone.

Backspace

010

Moves cursor to the left one
character position; if cursor is
at left margin, no action occurs.

Horizontal

011

Moves cursor to next tab stop, or
to right margin if there are no
more tab stops.

Line feed

012

Causes a line feed or a new line
operation (See line feed/new line
mode.) Causes printing if
in
terminal mode and if auto print
operation selected.

Vertical tab

013

Processed as LF.

Form feed

014

Processed as LF.

Carriage
return

015

Moves cursor to
current line.

Shift out

016

Selects
Gl
character
set
designated by a select character
set sequence.

Shift in

017

Selects
GO
character
set
designated by a select character
set sequence.

Device
control 1

DCl

021

Processed as
XON. DCl causes
terminal to continue transmit~ing
characters.
(Terminal
mode
only) •

Device
control 3

DC3

023

Processed as XOFF. DC3 causes
terminal to stop transmitting all
characters except XOFF and XON.
(Terminal mode only) •

Cancel

CAN

030

If received during an escape or
control
sequence, cancels the
seq~~nce
and
displays
substitution character( ).

Substitute

sus

032

Processed as CAN.

Escape

ESC

033

Processed
introducer.

Index

IND

204

Processes a line feed.

Next line

NEL

205

Processes as a CR LF sequence.

Horizontal tab
set

HTS

210

Sets a horizontal
location.

Reverse index

215

Equals a reverse line feed.

left

margin on

, sequence

tab at cursor

Name

Character
Mnemonic

Octal
Code

Function

Single shift 2

SS2

216

Selects G2 character set for
next character only.

the

Single shift 3

SS3

217

Selects G3 character set for
next character only.

the

Control sequence
introducer

CSI

233

Equals an ESC [

ANSI Compatible Sequences
Set Mode
Name

Mnemonic

Mode

Sequence

Keyboard action
Insertion-replacement
Send-receive
Line feed/new line
Cursor key
ANSI/VT52
Column
Scrolling
Screen
Origin
Auto Wrap
Auto repeat
Print form feed
Print extent

KAM
IRM
SRM
LMN
DECCKM
DECANM
DECCOLM
DECSCLM
DECSCNM
DECOM
DECAWM
DECARM
DECPFF
EDCPEX

Locked
Insert
Off
New line
Application
ANSI
132 column
Smooth
Reverse
Relative
On
On
On
Full screen

ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
N/A
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

Name

Mnemonic

Mode

Sequence*

Keyboard Action
Insertion-replacement
Send-receive
Line feed/new line
Cursor Key
ANSI/VT52
Column
Scroll ing
Screen
Origin
Auto wrap
Auto repeat
Print form feed
Print extent

KAM
IRM
SRM
LMN
DECCKM
DECANM
DECCOLM
DECSCLM
DECSCNM
DECOM
DECAWM
DECARM
DECPFF
DECPEX

Unlocked
Replace
On
Line feed
Cursor
VT52
80 column
Jump
Normal
Absolute
Off
Off
Off
Scroll ing
region

ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

2 h
4 h
1 2 h **
2 0 h
? 1 h
[ ? 3 h
[ ? 4 h
[ ? 5 h
[ ? 6 h
[ ? 7 h
[ ? 8 h
[ ? 1 8 h**
[ ? 1 9 h**

Reset Mode

2 1
4 1
1 2 1**
2 0 1
? 1 1
[ ? 2 1
[ ? 3 1
[ ? 4 1
[ 5 ? 1
[ ? 6 1
[ ? 7 1
[ ? 8 1
[ ? 1 8 1**
[ ? 1 9 1**
[
[
[
[
[

*The last character of the sequence is lowercase ~(154 octal)
**Terminal mode only.

Cursor Key Codes Generated

Cursor Key
(Arrow)

ANSI Characters Generated
Reset
Set
(Application)
(Cursor)

Up
Down
Right
Left

ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

ESC a A
ESC a B
ESC a C
ESC a D

A
B

C
D

Keypad Character Selection
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Al ternate
Numeric

DECKPAM
DECKPNM

ESC
ESC>

Keypad Codes Generated

Key
0

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

- (minus)
,(comma)
• (period)
ENTER
PF1
PF2
PF3
PF4

VT52

Numeric
Keypad
Mode

Alternate
Keypad
Mode

ESC ? P
ESC ? q
2
ESC ? r
ESC ? s
3
4
ESC ? t
ESC ? u
5
6
ESC ? v
7
ESC ? w
8
ESC ? x
ESC ? Y
9
-(minus) ESC ? m
,(comma) ESC ? 1*
• (period) ESC ? N
Same as
ESC ? M
RETURN
ESC P
ESC P
ESC Q
ESC Q
ESC R
ESC R
ESC S
ESC S
0

ANSI
Numeric
Keypad
Mode

ANSI
Alternate.
Keypad
Mode

ESC a p
ESC a q
ESC a r
ESC a s
ESC a t
ESC a u
ESC a v
6
ESC a w
7
8
ESC a x.
ESC a y
9
- (minus) ESC a m
,(comma) ESC a 1*
• (period) ESC a n
Same as
ESC a M
RETURN
ESC a P
ESC a P
ESC a Q
ESC a Q
ESC a R
ESC a R
ESC a S
ESC a S
0

1
2
3
4
5

*The last character ~f the sequence is lowercase L (154 octal)

Select Character Sets SCS
Character Set

GO Designator

Gl Designator

United Kingdom (UK)
United States (USASCII)
Special characters
and line drawing set

ESC
ESC
ESC

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Single shift 2
Single shift 3

SS2
SS3

ESC N
ESC 0

A
B

Character Attributes
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Select graphic rendition
(no attributes)

SGR

ESC

Select graphic rendition
(no attr ibutes)

SGR

EC [ 0 m

Select graphic rendition
(select attribute bold)

SGR

ESC

I m

Select graphic rendition
(select attribute underl ine)

SGR

ESC

4 m

Select graphic rend i tion
(select attribute blink)

SGR

ESC

5 m

Select graphic rendition
(select attribute, reverse video)

SGR

ESC

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Cursor up
Cursor down
Cursor forward ( right)
Cursor backward (left)
Cursor position
Cursor position (home)
Hor izontal and vertical position
Horizontal and vertical position
(home)
Index
Reverse index
Next line
Save cursor (and attributes)
Restore cursor (and attributes)

euu
CUD
eUF
CUB
CUP
CUP
HVP
HVP

ESC
ESC
ESC
ESc
ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

IND
RI
NEL
DEese
DEeRe

ESC D
ESC M
ESC E
ESC 7
ESC 8

[

7 m

Scrolling Region

Pn A
Pn B
Pn e
Pn D
PI; Pc H
H
PI; Pc f
f

Tab Stops
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Horizontal tab set
(at current column)
Tabulation clear
(at current column)
Tabulation clear
(at current column)
Tabulation clear (all tabs)

HTS

ESC H

TBC

ESC

TBC

ESC

0 g

TBC

ESC

3 g

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Double-height top half
Double-height bottom half
Single-width single-height
Double-width single-height

DECDHL
ECDHL
DECSWL
DEC OWL

ESC t
ESC i
ESC t
ESC i

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Erase in line
(cursor to end of line)
Erase in line
(cursor to end of line)
Erase in line
(beginning of line to cursor)
Erase in line
(entire line containing cursor)
Erase in display
(cursor to end of screen)
Erase in display
(cursor to end of screen)
Erase in display
(beginning of screen to cursor)
Erase in display
(entire screen)

ESC

0 K

ESC

1 K

ESC

2 K

ESC [ J

ESC

0 J

ESC

1 J

ESC

2 J

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Delete character
Insert line
Delete line

DCH

ESC [ Pn P
ESC [ Pn L
ESC [ Pn M

Line Attributes

3
4
5
6

Erasing

Editing Functions

Print Commands for Terminal Mode
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Media copy (enter auto print)
Media copy (exit auto print)
Media copy
(enter printer controller)
Media copy
(exit printer controller)
Media copy (Print Screen)
Media copy (Print Screen)
Media copy (print cursor line)

MC
MC
MC

ESC [ ? 5 i
ESC [ ? 4 i
ESC [ 5 i

ESC

4 i

MC
MC
MC

ESC
ESC
ESC

i
0 i
? I i

Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Device status report
(request status of VTI02)
Response:
Terminal OK

DSR

ESC

5 n

DSR

ESC

o n

Device status report
(request status of printer)
Response:
Printer ready
Printer not ready
No printer

DSR

ESc

? 1 5 n

DSR
DSR
DSR

ESC [ ? I 0 n*
ESC [ ? I 1 n*
ESC [ ? I 3 n*

Device status report
(report cursor position)
Cursor position report

DSR

ESC

6 n

CPR

ESC

PI; Pc R

DA
DA

ESC [ c
ESC [ 0 c
ESC Z

Reports

Device attributes (what are you)
Device attributes (what are you)
Identify terminal (what are you)

DEClO
NOTE

ESC Z is not recommended.
Device attributes
response: VTI02

NOTE
ESC c is not recommended.
*Terminal mode o~ly.

ESC [ ? 6 c

Reset
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Reset to initial state

RIS

ESC c

CAUTION
Do not use, unpredictable results.
Tests and Adjustments
Name

Mnemonic

Sequence

Screen alignment display
(fill screen with "ES")

DECALN

ESC

VT52 Compatible Mode
Modes

Sequence

Enter ANSI mode

ESC

Keypad Character Selection
Name

Sequence

Enter alternate keypad mode
Exit alternate keypad mode
(Numeric keypad mode)

ESC =
ESC>
NOTE

VT52 alternate keypad
different than ANSI.

and

numeric

keypad

mode

Character Sets
Name

Sequenc.e

Special graphics character set ESC F*
Select US/UK character set
ESC G
(as determined by US/UK
character Set-Up feature)
*Same as special character and line drawing set in ANSI mode.

Cursor Position
Name

Sequence

Cursor up*
Cursor down*
Cursor right*
Cursor left*
Cursor to horne
Direct cursor address
Reverse line feed

ESC A
ESC B
ESC C
ESC D
ESC H
ESC Y pI Pc**
ESC I***

*Same when sent from the terminal.
**Line and column numbers for direct cursor address are single
character codes whose values are the desired number plus 37 octal.
Line and column number start at one.
***The last character of the sequence is an uppercaSe I
Erasing
Name

Sequence

Erase to end of line
Erase to end of screen

ESC K
ESC J

Print Commands for Terminal Mode
Name

Sequence

Enter auto print mode
Exit auto print mode
Enter printer controller mode
Exit printer controller mode
Print Screen
Print cursor line

ESC
ESC ESC W
ESC X
ESC]
ESC V

Reports
Name

Sequence

Identify (what are you)
Response: VTI02
(same as VT52)

ESC Z
ESC / Z

(Ill octal).

APPENDIX B
CONTROL FUNCTIONS (SEQUENCE FORMATS)

GENERAL
This appendix summarizes the ANSI code extension techniques defined in
standards X3.4l-l974 and X3.64-l979. Those specifications cover many
special cases and details not included here.

Control Functions
The ANSI standards detine types of characters used for specific
purposes. You can determine a character's type by its position in the
ASCII table (Table 22).
There are two general categories
of
characters:
•

display (columns 2 through 7; 10-15)

•

control (columns

a and 1; 8 and 9)

This table and the ANSI system can work for either a 7-bit or 8-bit
character environment.
The Rainbow 100 computer uses both 7-bit. and
8-bit characters.
NOTE
The ASCII 7-bit table corresponds to International
Standards
Organization
(ISO)
standard
646 and
International Telegraph and
Telephone
Consultive
Committee (CCITT) alphabet 5.
All control characters and groups of characters (sequences)
not
intended for display on the screen are control functions. Not all
control functions perform an action in every ANSI device, but each
device can recognize all control functions and discard any that do not
apply to it. Therefore, each device performs a subset of the ANSI
functions.
Because different devices use different subsets, compliance with ANSI
does not mean compatibility between devices. Compliance only means
that a particular function,
if defined in the ANSI standard,
is
invoked by the same control function in all devices.
If an ANSI
device does not perform an action that has a control function defined
in the ANSI standard,
it cannot use that control function for any
other purpose.

'l'able 23:

BITS

b8
b7

,--

ROW

b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

o 000

NUL

o 0 0

SOH

STX

o 0

ETX

o 1 o 0>

EOT

o 1 0

ENQ

o 1 1 0

ACK

1 0

o 0

BEL
BS

0
0
0
1

1
1
2
2
2
3
3

3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7

20
16
10

OC1
iXONI

21
17
11

OC2

22
18
12

OC3
iXOFFI

23
19
13

DC4

24
20
14

NAK

25
21
15

SYN
ETB

CAN

8
8

••

"£
$

26
22
16
27
23

(

24
18

11
9
9

31
25
19

1 0

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
lA

o 1 1

13
11
8

ESC

33
27
18

14
12
C

34
28
lC

35
29
10

1 0

o 1

16
14
E

17
15
F

1
0

OLE

15
13
0

NOTE:

1
1

)

*
+

36
30

IE
37
3>1
IF

32
20

41
33
21
42
34
22
43
35
23
44

36
24
45
37
25
46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40

28
51
41
29

101
65
41

121
81
51

102
66
42

61
49
31

62
50
32

63
51
33
64
52
34

65
53
35

C
0

67
55
37

56
38

68
44

69
45
106
70
46
107
71

103
67
43
104

105

120

64
40

,
a
b
C

126

V
W

56
127
87
57

110
72
48

88
58

141
97
61
142
98

62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102

160

112
70

161
113
71

162
114
72

163
115
13

147
103
67

150
104
68

151
105
69

170

111
73
49

52
42
2A

72
58
3A

112
74
4A

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

53
43
28>

;

73
59
38

113
75
48

[

133
91
58

153
107
68

{

114
76
4C

115
77
40

]

54
2C

55
45
20

74
60
3C
75
61
30

56
46
2E

76
62
3E

57
47
2F

63
3f

116
78
4E
117
79
4F

131
89

134
92
5C
135
93
50

166
118
76
167
119
77

71
57
39

164
116
74
165
117
75

130

140
96
60

154
108
6C
155
109
60

136
94
5E

156
110
6E

137
95
5F

157
111
6F

1
1

122
82
52
123
83
53»
124
84
> 54
125
85
55

DEPENDS ON THE CHARACTER SET SELECTED; U.S.-# U.K.- J:

I--

100

1
1

0
0

COLUMN

OS/OK ASCII Characters

120
7B
171
121
79
172
122
7A
173
123
78

174
124
7C

}

175
125
70

DEL

176
126
7E
177
127
7F

GL CODES
COCODES--'ofo--'--------(ASCIiGRAPHICS)-----------t'

KEY
CHARACTEREill33 OCrAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

MR;9593

Table 24:

8
1

1
a

NEL

HTS

11
1

200
128
80

220
144
90

201
129
Bl

221
145
91

202
130
82

240
160
AO

261
177
Bl

262
17B
B2

241
161
Al

222
146
92

242
162
A2

203
131
83

223
147
93

243
163
A3

204
132
84

224
148
94

263
179
B3

321
209
Dl

..A

32.5
213
D5

326
214
D6

307
199
C7
310
200
C8

305
197
C5

266
182
86

,IE

306
198
C6

207
135
87

227
151
97

247
167
A7

267
183
87

210
136
88

230
152
98

250
168
A8

270
184
88

211
137
89

231
153
99

251
169
A9

271
185
B9

212
138
8A

232
154
9A

252

272
186
BA

213
139
8B

233
155
98

253
171
AB

273
187
BB

114

274
lB8
8C

112

275
189
BO

215
141
80

235
157
90

255
173
AD

SS2

216
142
8E

.!36
158
9E

256
174
AE

276
190
BE

SS3

217
143
BF

237
159
9F

257
175
Af

277
.191
BF

,
A

..E
,
I

,
I
A

••
I

323
211
D3

f.L

246
166
A6

322
210
D2

324
212
D4

245
165
A5

254
172
AC

265
181
85

234
156
9C

303
195
C3

264
180
84

226
150
96

1__ .... C1

206
134
86

320
208
DO

225
149
95

CSI

300
192
CO

302
194
C2

205
133
85

=t-

301
193
Cl

304
196
C4

-..

361
241
Fl

362
242
F2

363
243
F3

364
244
F4

365
245
F5

366
246
F6

367
247
F7

370
248
F8

371
249
F9

372
250
FA

373
251
FB

374
252
FC

375
253
FO

376
254
FE

377
255
FF

1 1

341
225
E1

343
227
E3

a
a

344
228
E4
345
229
E5

347
231
E7

£'

330
216
D8

,
U

315
205
CO

360
240
Fa

,
A

..U

..Y

350
232
E8

331
211
D9

351
233
E9

332
218
OA

352
234
EA

353
235
E8

333
219
08
334
220
DC
335
221
DO

316
206
CE

336
222
DE

317
207
CF

337
223
OF

.Jl

1
GR CODES
CODES----o·...·o-------(DEC SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS)

,I
,
I

340
224
EO

342
226
E2

b6
b5
b4 b3 b2 bl

327
215
D7

312
202
CA

314
204
CC

B.ITS

346
230
E6

313
203
CB

b7
1

311
201
C9

b8
1

244
164
A4

214
140
8C

r---

260
176
BO

COLUMN

1
1

a
1

1
1

a
1

a
a

1
a

INO

Control and Displayable Characters

354
236
EC
355
237
ED

356
238
EE

357
239
EF

,
0

',"
U

"
'u
U

ROW

-I

KEY
CHARACTERru06 OCTAL
,IE
198
DECIMAL
C6

HEX

MR·9594

Table 25;

0
0

BITS
84 83 B2 81

o 0 1

o 0 1 1

1
1

1
0

0
1

NUL

0
0
0

DC1

1
1
1

(XONI

2
2

ETX

DC3
IXOFFI

3
3
3

40
32
20

41
33
21

61
49
31

22
18
12

42
34

23
19
13

20
16
10

21
17
11

48
JO

101
65
41

121·
81
51

102
66
42

63
51

103

67
43

126

146
102
66

168
118
76

67
55
37

107
71
47

127

147
103
67

167
119
77

110
72
48

130
88

150
104
68

170
J20
78

151
105
69

171
121
79

152
106
6A

172
122
7A

153
107
68

154
108
6C
155
109
60

174
124
7C

175
125
70

25
21
15

45
37
25

65
53
35

o .1 1 0

6
6

26
22

68
54
36

27
23
17

46
38
26
47
39
27

50
40
28

CAN
:

11
9
9

12
10
A

SUB
ESC

)

51
41
29

71
57
39

111
73
49

131

32
26
lA

52
42
2A

72
58
3A

112
74
4A

132

33
27
18

53
43
28

;

73
59
38

113

[

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

55
45
20

75
61
3D

115
77
40

]

76
62
3E

116
78
4E

77
63
3F

117
79 (BLANKI
4F

13
11
8

o 0

14
12
C

34
28
lC

151

35
29
10

6
14

SI Ii'1715

36·
30
lE

37
31
lF

87
57

31
25
19

96
56

(

o 1 1

30
24
18

57
47
2F

56
38

163
115
73

106
70
46

5
5
5

10
8
8

ENQ

SCAN 9

165
117
75

SCAN 7

62
143
99
63

162
114
72

145
101
65

104
68

83
53

125
85
55

123

SCAN 5

64
52
34

7
7
7

142

161
113
71

105
69
45

BEL

122
82
52

164
116
74

44
36
24

141
97
61

160
112
70

SCAN 3

144
100
64

24
20
14

•

4
4
4

7
140
96
60

124
84
54

EOT

120
80
50

43
35
23

o 0

1
0

100
64
40

1. 0

1
0

COLUMN

r;;ow

o 0 1 0

000

Special Characters and Line Drawing Set

75
48

89
59

90
5A

133
91
58
134
92
5C
135
93
50 .
136
94
c 5E
137
95
5F

r
L

SCAN 1

173
123
7B

156
110
6E

176
126
7E

157
111
6F

177
127
7F

KEY
ASCII CHARACTERETIJ33 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
lB

HEX

MR-9581

Escape and Control Sequences
Escape and control sequences provide more controls in addition to the
control characters in the ASCII 7-bit table. These multiple-character
control sequences are not displayed but control the displaying,
processing, and transmission of characters. At the end of a sequence
or during an error condition, the terminal continues to display
received characters.
Escape Sequences
The format for an escape sequence is as follows:
ESC
033

1 •••• 1
040-057

Escape
sequence
introducer

Intermediate
characters
(0 or more
characters)

F
060-176
Final
character
(1 character)

Escape Sequence Introducer - This is the ESC character (octal 033)
defined by ANSI X3.4-1977. After receiving ESC, the terminal stores
(but does not display) all control function characters received in the
proper range.

Intermediate Characters - These are characters received after ESC in
the octal range of 040
057 (column 2 of the ASCII table). The
terminal stores intermediate characters as part of the control
function.

Final Character - This is a character received after ESC in the octal
range of 060
176
(columns 3 - 7 of the ASCII table). The final
character indicates the end of the control function. The intermediate
and final characters together define the function of the sequence.
The terminal then performs the specified function and continues to
display received characters. ANSI standard control functions have a
final character in the octal range of 100 - 176 (columns 4 - 7 of the
ASCII table).
Private sequences have a final character in the octal
range of 060 - 077 (column 3 of the ASCII table).
Example
Action:

Designate ASCII character set as GO.

Sequence
ESC (
B
033 050 102
Escape sequence
introducer
character

Intermediate Final character

Control Sequence Format
The format of a control sequence, is as follows:

CSI

P••••• P

1 ••••• 1

033 133

060-077

040-057

100-176

Control
sequence
introducer

Parameter
characters
(0 or more
characters)

Immediate
characters
(0 or more
(characters)

Final character
(1 character)

Control Sequence Introducer - The CSI is the ESC

(octal 033) and [
(octal 133) characters defined by ANS~ X3.41-1977. These characters
provide 8-bit control functions by using 7-bit characters.
After
receiving CSI characters, the Rainbow 100 computer stores (but does
not display) all control function characters received in the proper
range.

During an escape sequence, if the Rainbow 100 computer receives an
8-bit
control
character,
(octal 200-237), the escape sequence
continues after. rhe 8-bit control character's function is executed
if it is one of the supported functions.
An 8-bit display character, received during an esc'ape sequence, has
the 8th bit stripped off and the escape sequence continues with the
resultant 7-bit remainder.

Parameter Characters .... These are characters received after the CSI
character, in the octal range of 060 -077 (column 3 of the ASCII
table). The parameter characters modify the action or interpretation
of the control function. The terminal interprets parameter characters
as private when the < = >? characters (octal 074 077) begin the
,parameter string.
The
character (octal 072) is reserved. This
me,ans an ANSI-specified control sequence can have a parameter function
with a private interpretation.
The Ra inbow 100 computer uses two types o,f parameter characters,
numerlc ,and selective.
A numeric parameter represents a decimal
number', designated by Pn. The decimal characters have a range of 0 -9
(octal 060 ,- 071).
A sele'ctive parameter comes from a list of
specified parameters, ~esignated by Ps.
If a control sequence includes more than one parameter, the parameters
are separated by a delimiter, the; character (octal 073).

Intermediate Characters - These are characters received after the CSI
character, in the octal range of 040 -057 (column 2 of the ASCII
table). The terminal stores these characters as part of the control
function.
NOTE
The terminal ddes not use intermediate
control functions.

characters

Final Character - This is a character received after
the
CSI
character, in the octal range of 100 - 176 (columns 4 - 7 of the ASCII
table) •
The final character indicates the end of the control
function.
The intermediate and final characters together define the
function of the sequence. The terminal then performs the speci£ied
function and continues to display received characters. ANSI standard
control functions have a final character in the octal range of 100
157
(columns 4
6 of the ASCII table). Private sequences have a
final character in the octal range of 160 - 176 (column 7 of the ASCII
table) •
Example
Action:

Clear all horizontal tabs.

Sequence
ESC
[
3
9
033 133 063 147
Parameter
Control
sequence
character
introducer

Final
character

Sequence Examples
These examples show the use of multiple functions
sequence, private parameters and private sequences.
ESC [
?
4
h
033 133 077 064 150

Set smooth scroll mode
(? = ANSI private parameter)

ESC
[
2
;
1
Y
033 133 062 073 061 171

Invoke self-test
(y = ANSI private sequence)

selected

one

APPENDIX C
RAINBOW 100 COMPUTER AND VT100 TERMINAL FAMILY DIFFERENCES

The following is a list of the differences between the Rainbow 100 and
members of the VT100 family of terminals. Also included are certain
·points-of-interest" that should be considered by programmers.

DEC'S MULTINATIONAL 8-BIT CHARACTER
The Rainbow 100 computer implements the printing graphics found iri
DEC's Multinational Character set, and the 8-bit character codes for
the printing characters.
It is a subset of the Multinational
Character set.
It is not the full character set. In particular, it
does not implement all the control sequences specified for the
Multinational Character set.
When a keyboard other than the US LN201-AA is selected the Rainbow 100
computer can also implement the 7-bit National Replacement character
set for that country~
The active character set is selected via
SET-UP.

MULTINATIONAL 8-BIT CHARACTER CODES
DIGITAL has extended standard ASCII coding to introduce the DEC
Multinational Character set. This set gives a uniform coding for all
characters used in most European languages. It also adds characters
such as ¢, ©, 1/4, and 1/2. The full set is shown in Appendix F. To
represent these extra characters, DIGITAL uses 8 bits (standard ASCII
uses 7 bits). DIGITAL's Multinational Character set is an extension
of, and fully compatible with, the ASCII codes generally used in North
America.
European countries (and French Canada) also define modifications to
ASCII codes that replace certain ASCII characters with some of the
extra characters in use in their language. These codes are known as
National Replacement Character (NRC) codes. They use 7 bits to code
each character. These code sets can differ from the ASCII codes in up
to twelve positions. They are listed in Appendix F.
The Rainbow computer allows you to choose either DIGITAL's 8-bit
Multinational
Character set, or the 7-bit National Replacement
Character set associated with your keyboard.

(
68

8-BIT CHARACTER CODES
The Rainbow 100 computer accepts and acts on 8-bit character codes,
the VTl02 terminal always strips the 8th bit.
If a-bit codes are
received in VT52 mode, they will be handled the same as in ANSI mode.

Cl CONTROL CODES
Rainbow 100 computer executes (8-bit) control codes for index, next
line, horizontal tab set, reverse index, single shift 2, single shift
3, control sequence introducer. Reception of any Cl control code will
cause the appropriate action and not abort an escape sequence in
process (CSI restarts an escape sequence).

KEYBOARD AND 8-BIT KEY CODES
The Rainbow 100B keyboard is called the LK201 keyboard.
. It is
available in 15 different international varieties (See Appendix D).
Each keyboard can generate every character in the Multinational
character set via the compose mechanism.

COMPOSE CHARACTER SEQUENCES
Compose character sequences allow you to create and display accented
characters,
ligatures,
numerical
fractions, and other special
characters that may not be on your keyboard. There are two forms of
compose sequences that you can use to create and display a. character.
•

Two-key compose sequence

•

Three-key compose sequence

TWO-KEY COMPOSE SEQUENCE
A two-key compose sequence uses two keys to create a different
character.
For example, on the British keyboard, typing the acute
accent key, then typing E results ina new character: an E with an
acute accent.
Note that you do not use the Compose Character key to create two-key
compose sequences.
The only keys for which you can use the two-key
compose sequence are:
•

Diaeresis/umlaut mark ••

• . Ac-ute accent
•

Grave accent

•

Circumflex"

•

Tilde-

You must type the character key
compose sequences.

before

the

letter

key

the

NOTE
The two-key compose sequence cannot
North American (English) keyboard.

used

two-key

THREE-KEY COMPOSE SEQUENCE
You can use the three-key compose sequence on any keyboard. To start
a compose sequence, you press the Compose Character key; then, you
press the next two characters of the compose sequence.
(See Figure
E-l in Appendix E for the compose sequences and resulting characters.)
For example, if you press the Compose Character key, the acute accent
key, and the letter E in sequence, the screen displays an E with an
acute accent.
The order in which you type the characters is important.
Certain
sequences have an obvious order - the AE ligature and 1/4 fraction,
for example.
In these examples, the order may not be reversed.
When
you compose the E with an acute accent, you may type either the E or
the acute accent after you press the Compose Character key.
Use the ~ key if you want to cancel a compose sequence.

KEYBOARD CONTROL CODE GENERATION
The Rainbow 100 can be used with one of 15 different national LK201
keyboards.
Since not all of the keyboards have all the characters
used by the VTl02 to generate control codes all the keyboards can
generate the NULL, ESC, FS, GS, RS, US and DEL codes by using the
Control key in conjunction with keys 2-8 as described in table 3. The
numeric keys are always used in the unshifted position, even on those
keyboards where the numeral is in the shifted position.

SET-UP PURGING KEYBOARD BUFFER
When the Set-Up key is pressed to enter Set-Up mode in the Rainbow
100, the key-holding buffer is cleared which causes any unserviced
keys to be lost and Set-Up is immediately honored.

WAIT INDICATOR

When the keyboard buffer fills up, the Rainbow 100 computer ignores
further entries and sounds the bell.
It lights the Wait LED as the
VTl02 terminal does. The bell and Wait LED are used to notify the
user that the key was not accepted.

KEYBOARD PRINT SCREEN KEY IN TERMINAL MODE
Terminal mode print functions are implemented via the Print Screen key
on the Rainbow 100 computer. VTl02 terminal uses the keypad Enter
key. Rainbow 1008 Print Screen is equivalent to VTl02's <Shift/Enter>
and
Rainbow 1008 <Ctrl/Print Screen> is equivalent to VTl02's
<Ctrl/Enter>.

KEYBOARD HOLD SCREEN KEY
The Hold Screen key on the Rainbow 100 computer does not work the same
as the NO SCROLL key on a VTI02 terminal. On a VTI02 terminal it
sends an XOFF/XON as it toggles back and forth,
the <Ctrl/S> and
<Ctrl/Q> typed from the keyboard can be used to get the same effect.
Setting Hold Screen for the Rainbow 100 computer does not necessarily
cause an XOFF to be sent. It sets an internal flag that causes the
"receive character" process to loop until the flag is cleared.
This
effectively "hangs" any console output (normal or direct) in console
mode.
In terminal mode this "hang" causes the comm receive buffer to
fill up until it reaches the high water mark at which point it will
send an XOFF, if enabled by Set-Up. After the Hold Screen is removed,
characters are removed from the receive buffer until the low water
mark is reached which causes XON to be sent, if enabled.
As a result of this method of implementation, Rainbow 100
honors Hold Screen even in "local", VTl02 terminal does not.

computer

In Rainbow 100 terminal mode, after using Hold Screen on incoming
data, the last char for display is being 'held'. Entering setup,
switching to local, and exiting from setup does not clear the 'hold'
state or the char.
When 'hold'
is finally removed, the char
originally being 'held' is displayed before any locally generated
characters.
In the Rainbow 100 computer, if the
while the Hold Screen is asserted,
the 'hold' is removed and char being
terminal prints a screen even if the

Print Screen key is depressed
the print is deferred until after
'held' is processed.
The VTI02
NO SCROLL key as been depre'ssed.

KEYBOARD CORSOR KEY MODES
Cursor key mode and keypad mode for the Rainbow 100 computer are
independent.
In the VTI02 terminal, the cursor keys only send
application codes if both cursor and keypad modes are set to
'application' •

PRINTER CHARACTER SETS IN TERMINAL MODE
The Rainbow 100 computer assumes the printer is
receiving 8-bit DEC Multinational characters.

capable

properly

PRINTING BLOB CHARACTERS IN TERMINAL MODE
When printing from the screen in terminal mode and encountering a
'blob' character, the VTI02 terminal sends ASCII 'SUB' to the printer.
The Rainbow 100 computer sends the VT100 line-drawing graphics
character 'blob' bracketed by the appropriate character set selection
escape sequence if required~

PRINTER PORT DEFAULTS
Factory Set-Up defaults are not the same as the VTl02 terminal for the
printer port.

PRINT CURSOR LINE OPERATION IN TERMINAL MODE
At the completion of a 'print cursor line'
operation, Rainbow 100
computer sends the escape string to restore the printers GO char set
in between the terminating carriage return and line feed.
VTI02
terminal sends it after the line feed.

PRINTER PORT STATUS REQUEST IN TERMINAL MODE
The following anomaly occurs when a printer cable is attached to a
Rainbow after it is powered up, but the printer end of the cable is
not attached to anything.
A printer status request is made to Rainbow
Rainbow responds:
Printer not ready
or No printer
VTI02 responds:
No printer

ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC

? n
11n
13 n
13n

TERJlIINAL 10
The Rainbow 100 computer identifies itself as a VTI02 terminal.

INSERT AND DELETE LINE ESCAPE SEQUENCES
Insert Line:
Default line:

CSI
CSI

Pn
Pn

L
M

If the cursor is on the last line of the scrolling regions, and the
line is double-width, then after execution of either of the above
controls, the active line attributes are:
AD On Rainbow 100:

single-width

80 On the VTI02 terminal: whatever the active line attributes
were
before
execution
of
the control
sequence.

ALTERNATE ROM CHARACTER SETS
Rainbow 100 computer does not implement the
sets found in the VTI02 terminal.

alternate

ROM

character

ALTERNATE ROM AND LED ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The Rainbow 100 computer parses but ignores the escape sequences to
set GO and Gl to the alternate ROM and alternate ROM special graphics
(ESC ( 1 , ESC ( 2 , ESC ) 1 , ESC ) 2 ). It will parse but ignore
the escape sequence for LED control (ESC [ Pn q ). Rainbow has no
alternate ROMs and the LEDs are not available for software control.

G2 AND G3 CHARACTER SETS
G2 and G3 are permanently.designated as the NVM default character set.
They are either US or UK variations of Rainbow's subset of the
multinational character set.
They can be invoked
for
single
characters by the single-shift-2 or single-shift-3 escape sequences or
the Cl control codes.

ABORTING ESCAPE SEQUENCES BY INTERMEDIATE CHARACTERS
Rainbow 100 computer aborts escape sequence parsing when it finds an
intermediate char causing all following characters to be displayed.
VTl02 terminal aborts the sequence but continues parsing until it
finds a final char so the intervening part of the escape sequence does
not display.

INSERT AND REPLACE MODES
Rainbow 100 computer ~lways sets insertion/replacement
replacement before savlng into NVM.
These modes are
selectable. They are only selectable by software.

mode
to
not user

SELFTEST ESCAPE SEQUENCES
The Rainbow 100 computer parses but ignores the escape sequences to
run self tests
(ESC
[ 2 , Pn y ). Also the device status report
request (ESC [ 5 n ) will always cause the ready, no malfunctions
reply ( ESC LOn ).

RESET TO INITIAL STATE
In Rainbow 100 computer, ESC c (reset to initial state) does not reset
keypad and cursor keys to their normal modes. RIS is a dangerous
sequence to issue from workstation software. It is not recommended to
be used.
Its function will change in future versions of Rainbow.

VT52 MODE ABD ORIGIN MODE
The Rainbow 100 computer in VT52 mode honors the origin mode
VTI02 terminal in VT52 modes does not.

setting,

AOTOWRAP MODE
The
Rainbow
100
computer
maintains
the
wrap-pending
flag
unconditionally and tests it conditionally. VTI02 terminal maintains
the
flag
conditionally
and
tests
it
conditionally.
This
implementation
affects where the next character goes when the
auto-wrap mode is CHANGED while the cursor is in the 'line-filled'
position.
The VTI02 terminal places the cursor in a different place
than the Rainbow. Software is recommended to not use auto wrap mode
for controlling the placement of the text on the screen.

TAB AND AUTO WRAP
In Rainbow 100 computer the Tab character always
clears
the
wrap-pending flag. As a result, if Tab is the 8lst char in an 80 char
1 ine, char 82 will not wrap but char 83 will. In a VTl02 terminal,
char 82 will wrap.

XON/XOFF PROTOCOL AND BUFFER SIZE IN TERMINAL MODE
In Rainbow 100 terminal mode, the second
XOFF
is
sent
at
'buffer-full'.
In a VTl02 terminal, the second XOFF is sent 12 char
before 'buffer-full'. Also the Rainbow 100 buffer is 255 char in
size, a VTl02 terminal is 128.

FULL DUPLEX COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL IN TERMINAL MODE
The Rainbow 100 computer always precedes the dropping of DTR with a
EOT character.
The VTl02 terminal does not always do this. The
Rainbow 100 computer does not disconnect if it is placed in Local
mode. The VTl02 terminal disconnects if placed in local mode.

HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATION SUPPORT IN TERMINAL MODE
The Rainbow 100 terminal emulation does not support
communication protocols of theVTl02 terminal.

the

half

duplex

APPENDIX D
INTERNATIONAL LANGUAGE KEYBOARDS

The figures in this appendix illustrate the different national
language keyboards that are or will be available. One of the main
differences is the label strip that you add to the top of the
keyboard. The label strip comes in the country kit.

DDDDD DDDD
D[](][:][[][][][][[][[](]LJ(]~

DEJEJ[][][]~~DEJ~(][]D

LJDEJ[]~D[]~[][][J[]LJGJ

D[][][]D[][][]~DD[]D

t:=J1

LJEJEJLJ

O[][]D
[][J[]D
[][][JD'"'
~D

MR-9570

Figure 5:

LK201-AE British Keyboard

DDDDD DDDDD DDDD
LJD[i][][][](][J~[J[]LJ[;]~

DEJEJ[][][]~~DEJ~[][]D·"'"
LJDEJ[]~D[]~[][][JDDD
D[][][]D[][][]~DD[]D

t:=J1

LJEJEJLJ

O[][]D
[][J[JD
[][][JD""
~D

MR-9572

Figure 6:

LK201-AA American (English) Keyboard

Fll
IESC)

fU
{SS)

F1J

Opl.onl

ILF)

suppl

MR-9583

Figure 7:

LK201-AC Canadian (French) Keyboard

DDDDD DDDD

EJLJLJLJ

[][][][]

[J[][]O

[][][]Fl
~DU

MR-9578

Figure 8:

LK201-AD Danish Keyboard

EJLJLJLJ

[][][][]

[J[][]O
[][][]DOOO
~D
MR-9569

Figure 9:

LK201-AF Finnish Keyboard

EJLJLJLJ

[][][][]
[][J[]D
[][][]fl
~DU

MR-9581

Figure 10:

LK201-AG Austrian/German Keyboard

00000 00000 DODD
D[[]~[i]lOLD[[][J[][]lDD[]~

DEJEJ~[][][][]DEJ[]D[]n

LJuEJ[J[]DEJ[J[][][][]D[]~
D[J[]EJD[][][]~DD[8D

EJLJEJLJ

[][][][]
[][J[]D
[][][]D'~'"
~D

MR-9577

Figure 11:

LK201-AH Dutch Keyboard

00000 00000 DODD

MR-9573

Figure 12:

LK201-AI Italian Keyboard

DDDDD DDDDD DDDD

DDDD

EJ[]LJLJ

D[](](][;j(][[][][][](]O(]E:]
DEJEJ[]~~EJEJD[][][J[]n

LJuEJ[][]DEJ[][][JDrrJ[2][:]~
I~

. 1[J[][]D[][][]~DDLJc:=J

~I
~.

I
.

[][][][]

E][][]D
[J[][].rl

CJDU
MR-9575

Figure 13:

l.K201-AK Swiss (French) Keyboard

DDDD

EJ[]LJLJ

O[][J[]

E][][]D

[J[][]fl

CJDU

MR-9582

Figure 14:

l.K201-AL Swiss (German) Keyboard

DDDDD DDDD

EJ[]LJLJ

O[][][]

E][][]O

[J.[][] 0··

CJD

MR-9580

Figure 15:

LK201~AM

Swedish Keyboard

DDDD

EJEJ[JLJ

[JEJ[][]

rn[]D

[][][]rl
~DU
MR-9579

Figure 16:

LK20l-AR Norwegian Keyboard

DDDDD DDDD

EJEJ[JLJ

[JEJ[][]
[]~[]D

[][][]rl
~DU
MR-9571

Figure 17:

LK20l-AP Belgian/French Keyboard

~:~:: HERVAr A"HULEn :::~:

E.IHDE

DDDDD DDDD

EJEJ[JLJ

[JEJ[][]
[]~[]D

[][][]rl
~DU
MR-9576

Figure 18:

LK20l-AT Flemish Keyboard

Figure 19:

LK201-AS Spanish Keyboard

APPENDIX E
COMPOSE SEQUENCES

Table 26 shows the compose sequences you must type
special characters that you may need.

,
A
,

a•
,

..IE

a
0

c 0

"e'

,
,

e•

- •

6
,
0

.,"

"
"

6
0•

U-

" 1/2
" 1/4

« < <
» > >

/
/

" ,-r

..I

,
E
,
e

*
*

•

generate

,
,

0
0

a
!

+ +
+

±
\
Ii-

I
I

2
A

4
MR-ll083

Table 26:

Impl icit Compose Sequences

some

Table 27 shows the dead diacritical keys for each language keyboard.

DEAD DIACRITICAL
KEYS

KEYBOARD

K201-AB Belgian/Flemish
K201-AC Canada (French)
K201-AD Danish
K201 -AE British
K201-AF Finnish
K201 -AG Austrian/German
K201-AH Netherlands
K201-AI Italian
K201-AK Swiss (French)
K201-AL Swiss (German)
K201-AM Swedish
K201-AN Norwegian
K201-AP Belgian/French
K201-AS Spanish

II
II
II
II
II
.'

II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II

LJ-0140

Table 27:

Dead Diacritical Keys

APPENDIX F
7-BIT/DEC 8-BIT TRANSLATIONS

The following figures show the 7-bit and
character sets for each language keyboard.
KEYBOARD

7-bit NRC
TABLE USED

American
Belgian/Flemish
Canadian (French)
Danish
British
Finnish
Austrian/German
Dutch
Italian
Swiss (French)
Swiss (German)
Swedish
Norwegian
Belgian/French
Spanish

(none)
French
French Canadian
Norwegian /Danish
United Kingdom
Finnish
German
Dutch
Italian
Swiss
Swiss
Swedish
Norwegian/Danish
French
Spanish

8-bit

translations

MR-11081

Figure 20:

Mapping Keyboard to National Replacement Characters

and

0
0

BITS
B4 83 92 81 ~

NUL

0
0
0

I
I
I

2
2
2

1 0

ENQ

BEL

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5

DCl
!XONI

10
8
8

11
9
9

0
1

40
32
20

41
33

42
34
22
43
35
23

17
11
22
12

DC3

(XOFFJ

23
19
13

24
20
14

15
25
22
16

1
1

23
17

CAN

24
18
31

25
19

(

)

12
10
A

SUB

32
26
1A

13
11
8

ESC

14
12
C

34
28
lC

1 0

15
13
0

35
29

16
14

36
30

17
15
F

37
31
IF

DECIMAL

' - _ - '........... HEX

46
38
25
47
39

103
67
43

123

104
68
44

57
47
2F

83
53
124
84
54

61
142
98
62

160
112

161

113
71

162
114

143
99
63

163
115
73

144
100
64

164
116
74
165

105
69
45

125
85
55

145
101
65

66
54
36

126
86
56

146
102
66

166
118
76

67
55
37
70

106
70
46
107
71
47

127
87
57

147
103
67

167

130

150
104
68

77
170
120
78

151
105
69

171
121

;

57
39
72

58
3A

73
59

111
73
49

131

112
74
4A

132
90
5A

152
106
6A

113
75
48

133
91

153
107

173
123
78

174
124
7C

175
125

72
48

88
58

89
59

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

75
61
3D

115
77
40

76
62

116
78
4E

'"I

136
94

117
79

137
95

77
63
3F

110

<
=
>

117

65
53
35

55
45

52
34

140
96
60
141

54
44
2C

51
33

101
65
41

122

6
120
80
50
121
81

102
66
42

50
40
28

2D
56

r-----r---. OCTAL

Figure 21:

100
64
40

36
24
45

62
50
32

60
48
30
61
49
31

KEY

0
1

20
16
10

6
6
6
7
7
7

ASCII CHARACTER

1
0

COLUMN

0
1

0
0

134
92
5C
135

I
m

154
108
6C
155
109
60

172
122
7A

156
110

176
126

6'
157
111
6F

DEL

177

7E
127

Highlights differences
from ASCII

MR-11137

French Canadian Character Set (7-bit)

NOTE

Empty positions are reserved for future use.

0
0

BITS
64 63 62 81
0

r;ow
0

1 0

0
1

1
0

0
1

1
1

COLUMN

0
0

DCl
{XONl

BS
HT

21
17
11

#
$
%

27
23
17
30
2'
lB

(

)

25
19

12
10
A

SUB

ESC

33
27
lB

26
lA

14
12
C

1 0

15
13
0

35
29
lD
36
30
37
31

16
14

17
15
F

2B
lC

*
+

44
36

.
-

46
38
26
47
39
27

50
40
2B

52
34

65
53
35

66
54

62
42
2A

;

56
46

2E
57
47

101
65
41
102
66
42

121
Bl
51

122
B2
52

103
67

123
B3

161
113

162
114
72

163
115
73

143

99
63

144
100
64

164
116
74

105

125
B5
55

145
101
65

165
117
75

126
B6

146
102
66
147
103
67

166
118
76

167
119
77
170
120
7B

69
45

106
70

46
107
71

127

130
8B
58
131
89

47
110
72

111
73
49

B7
57

72
5B
3A

112
74
4A

132

73
59
3B

113
75
4B

133

75
61
3D

115
77
4D

116
7B

136
94

117
79

137

150
104
6B

151
105

171
121

172
122
7A

134
92
5C
135

153
107
6B

173

154
lOB
6C
155
109
6D

174
124
7C

152
106
6A

124
B4
54

160
112

104
68
44

114
76
4C

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B

74
60
3C

76
62

6
120
BO

57
39

67
55
37

5
100

51
41
29

54
44

63
33
64

45
37
25

43
35
23

11
9
9

4B
30
61
49
31

23
19
13

25
21
15

CAN

20
14

10
B
B

32
20

6
6
6
7
7
7

DC3
(XQFFj

2
20
16
10

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5

0
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2

NUL

175
125

156
110

6'
157
111
6F

DEL

123

176

'"
7E

177
127

KEY
ASCII CHARACTERETIJsc
33
OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

Figure 22:

Highlights differences

from ASCII

MR-11143

Finish Character Set (7-bit)

NOTE

Empty positions are reserved for future use.

0
0

BITSr-

COLUMN

1 0

NUL

DC1
{XONI

2
2
2

ENQ

BEL

DC3

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5

(XQFFI

CAN

12
10
A

SUB

13
11
6

ESC

1 0

23
19
13

24
20
14

25
21

30
24
16

50
32

101

102
66
42

103
67
43
104
66
44

144
100
64

164
116
74

165
117
75

66
54
36

106

126
86
56

166
116
76

67
55
37
70
56
36

127
67
57

146
102
66
147
103
67

130
66
56

150
104
66

167
119
77
170
120
76

111
73
49

131
69
59

151
105
69

132
90
SA

152
106
6A

133
91
56

153
107
6.

173
123
76

134
92
5C
135
93
5D

154
10.
6C
155
109
6D

174
124
7C

175
125
7D

50
40
28

46
107
71
47
110
72

113
75

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

55
45
2D

75
61
3D

115

OCTAL
DECIMAL

145
101
65

HEX

163
115
73

73
59
36

125
65
55

;

33
27

162
114

(

57
39

122
62
52
123
63
53
124
64
54

105
69
45

53
43
26

161
113
71

65
53
35

36
30
IE
37

160
112
70

112
74
4A

16
14
E

60
141
97
61
142
96
62
143
99

45
37

29
10

140

64
52
34

72
58
3A

51
33

15
13
0

44
36
24

26
47
39
27

120
60
50
121
81
51

Figure 23:

31
62

32
26
1A

34
28
lC

ETI]sc

42
34
22
43
35
23

61
49

5
100
64
40

17
15
F

)

25
19

14
12
C

4
60
46
30

51
41
29

KEY
ASCII CHARACTER

41
33

22
16
12

10
6
6

1
0

3
40
32
20

23
17

26
22
16

6
6
6
7
7
7

21
17
11

11
9
9

0
1

2
20
16
10

1
0

1
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
1

84 B3 82 81 ROW

0
0

57
47

77
63
3F

.
..
§

116
78

117
79
4F

m
n

136
94

137
95
SF

156
110
6E
157
111
6F

Y
Z

..
DEL

171
121
79
172
122
7A

176
126
lE
177

127

Highlights differences
from ASCII

MR-11138

French Character Set (7-bit)

NOTE

Empty positons are reserved for future use.

0
66

BITS

NUL

a a 0

a a 1 a
a a

a 1 a a
a 1 a 1
a 1 1 a
a
1

a 0 a
a a 1

a 1

ENQ

DCl
(XON)

BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR

23
19
13

24
20

21
26
22
16

27
23

CAN

30
24

%
&

,
(

18
31
25

)

SUB

13
11
8

ESC

14
12
C

,
a

, ,

42
34
22
43
35
23

44
36

31
62
50
32
63
51

46
38
26

35
66
54
36

67
55
37
70
56
38
71

57
39

10'

6&
41

103
67
43

104
60
44

105
69
45

E
F
G

'06

70
46
107
71

122
82

52
123
03
53
124
84

111
73
49

131
89
59

112
74
4A

132

113
75
4S

133

53
43
28

;

54
44
2C

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

75
61
30

115
77
4D

i.i

76
62

116
78

136
94
5E

117
7.

137
95
SF

.
-

45
20

36
30

56
46

37
31

KEY
ASCII CHARACTERETIJ33 OCTAL
27

DECIMAL

HEX

57
47

63
3F

164
116
74

165
117
75

166
118
76

167
119
77
170
120
78

90
SA
91

134
92
5C
135
93
50

'0640

146
102
66
147
103
67

113
71

150
104

151
105
69

152
106
6A

153
107

173
123
78

154
108
6C
155
109
60

174
124
7C

175

156
110

176
126

DEL

177

163
115
73

33
27
18
34
28

73
59

126
86

130
88
58

143
99

145
101

162
114
72

160
112
70

"5
85
55

127

14'
97
61
142
96
62

144

52
42
2A

140
96
60

110
72
4S

120

34
65
53

5
100
64
40

102
66
42

45
37
25

39
27
50
40
28
51

35
29
10

4
60
40
30

32
26
lA

15
13

41
33

12
10
A

11
9
9

3
40
32
20

10
8
8

17
15
F

DC3
(XOFFI

6
6
6
7
7
7

21
17

3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5

0
1

2
20
16
10

2
2
2

a 1 1

1
1

a a

a
a
a

a 1 a

COLUMN

84838281 ROW

a a a a

m
n

157
111
6F

125
70

171
121
79
172
122
7A

127
7F

Highlights differences
from ASCII

MR-11135

Figure 24:

German Character Set (7-bi t)

NOTE

Empty positions are reserved for future use.

0
0

BITS
84 83 82 B1

ROW
0

NUL

1
0
0
0
1
1
I

2
2
2

3
3
3

ENQ

DC1
(XON)

BEL

7
7
7

\0
8
8

DC3

(XQFF)

CAN

12
\0
A

SUB

13
11
B

ESC

CR
SO
SI

32
26
lA

33
27

1
1

14
12
C

34
2B
lC

15
13
0

16
14
E

36
30
IE
37

29
lD

KEY
ASCII CHARACTERETIJsc
33
OCTAL
27

DECIMAL

HEX

Figure 25:

6
120
60
50
121

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B
62

101
65
41

62
50
32

102
66

122
B2
52

63
51

103

143
99

44
36
24
45
37
25

64
52

123
B3
53
124
84

144
100

65
53
35

42
34
22
43
35
23

38
26
47

54
36

67
55

53
43
2B

;

8
9

56
38

46
107
71

110
72

81
51

150
104
68

167
119
77
170
120
7B

151
105
69

152
106
6A

74
60
3C

75
61
3D

M
N

76
62

57
47

77
63
3F

40
116
78

117
79
4F

B9
59

134
92
5C
135

136

j
k

m
n

137

95
SF

147
103

133
91
5B

165
117
75

113
75
4B

166
liB

73
59
3B

164
116

56
127
B7
57
130
BB
5B

132
90
5A

146
102
66

115

163
115

112
74
4A

126
B6

55
45
2D

162
114

145
101

131

161
113

114

54
44
2C

160
112
70

125
B5
55

111
73
49

57
39

67
43
104
6B
44
105
69
45
106

52
42
2A

)

61
49
31

28
51
41
29

100
64
40

50
40

(

4
60

25
19

17
15

32
20
41
33

11
9
9

23
19

24
20

0
0

3
40

lB
12

27
23
17

21
17
11

6
6
6

0
1

2
20
16
10

4
4
4
5
5
5

1
0

COLUMN

0
1

0
0

153
107
6B

154
lOB
6C
155
109
6D

156
110
157
111

122
7A
173

123
7B
174
124
7C

175
125
70

176
126
7E

171
121
79
172

DEL

177
127

Highlight's differences
from ASCII

MR-11136

Italian Character Set (7--bi t)

NOTE
Empty positions are reserved for future use.

o 0
0

~!!,SROW
0 0

0 0

o 0 I

o 0

o I o 0

o 0

o D

•

1 0

o 0
o 1

1 1 0

1 "'

.. 83

0
I

I
I

COLUMN

NUL

0
0
0
I
I
I
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4

DCl
(XONI

18
12

DC3

(XOFFI

5
5

BS
HT

17
II

,
ENQ
BEL

2
20
16
10

23
19
13
24
20
14
25
21
15
26

6
6
6
7
7
7
10
8
8
II

22
27

CAN

•

30
2'
18
31
25

"32

SUB

13
II
8

ESC

14
12
C

34
28
IC

15
13
0

35
29
lD

16
14

36"
3D

17
15
F

37
31
IF

42
34

43
35
23
44
36
24
45

%
&
I

23
17

12
10
A

40
32
20

26
IA
33
27
18

KEY
ASCIICHARACTEREill33 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

(
)

37
25

46
38
26
47
39
27
50
40
28
51
41
29

*
+

53
43
28
54

".
/

3
4

5
6

7
8

37
70
56
71

57
39
72
58
3A

;

.. >
57

6'
53
35
66
54
36
67
55

73
59
38

46
2E
47

B
C

60
3C
75
61"
3D
76
62
77

63
3F

103
67
43
104

...

122
82
52

123..

93
53
124
8'

125
85

106
70
46
107

126
86

153
107
68

134
.2
5C
135
93
5D

164
lOB
6C
155
109
6D

110
72
48

130
98
58

111
73
49

131
89
59

112
74
4A

113
75
48

114
76
4C
115

116

m
90

136
94
5'

4E
117

137

7'
4F

61
142
98
62
143
99
63
144
100
64
145
101
65

133
91
58

127
67
57

71
47

140
88
60
141

146
102
56
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
6.
152
106
6A

6
120
80
50
121
81
51

5
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42

105
69
45

2C
55
45
2D

60
48
30
61
49
31
62
50
32
63
51
33
64
,2

.5
5F

162
114

163
115
73
164
116

165
117
75
166
118
76
167

"'
77

Y
Z

•

'" ii

110
6'
157
111
6F

160
112
70
161
113

170
120
78
171
121
7'
172
122
7A
173
123
78
17'
124
7C
175
125
7D
176
126
7E

DEL

177
127
7F

Highlights differences
from ASCII

MA-11133

Norwe,9 i.an/DanishCharacter Set (?-bi t)

NOTE
Empty pos it ions are reserved for "future use.

0
0

BITS

0 0

1 0

1 o

1 0

1 1 0

1 1

1 o

0 0

1 0 o

1 o

1 0

1 1

16
10

DCl
(XON)

,.
DC3 ,.

2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4

24
20
14
25
21
15
26

6
6
6
7
7
7
10
6

••

41
33
21

.2
3'

$
%
&
I

'3
36
23
44
36

24
45
37
25

4.
31
62

63
35

36
67

)

52
42
2A
53
'3
2.

:
;

54
44
2e

55
45
20

SUB

32
26
lA
33
27

13
11

ESC

•

1 o

15
13
0

35
29
10

15
14

36
3D
IE
37
31
IF

SO
SI

2.
Ie

17
15
F

KEY
ASCIICHARACTEflEill33 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

Figure 27:

*
+

.
/

55
37
70
56

72
5.

60
3e
75
61
3D

46
2E

76
62
3'

122
.2
52
123
.3
53
124

T
U

••

54
125
B5
55
126
B5
56
127
.7

130

111
73
49

131

J
K

••

112
74

'A
113
75
4.
11.
76
.e
115
77

116
76

M
L
A

94
5E

117
7.
4F

b
C

137
.5
5F

160
112
70

141
.7
61
142

161
113

..
..

162

62
143

e
f

9
h

59
132
90
5A
133
91
5.
134
92
50
135
93
50
136

..
..

140

110
72

Hig!llights
from ASCII

121

107
71
47

., •

3A
59
3.

6
120
.0

.. >
47
2F

38
71
57

103
67
.3
104
6B
44
105
6.
45
106
70

46
38
26

41
29

6'
52
34

(

16
31
25

102
66

• BS • CAN
,.
• HT •
11
9

5
100
64
40
101
6'
41

50
40
26

4
60

23
17

1 o

1 1 1 1

1 1 0

1
0

3
40
32

5
5
5

BEL

(XOFF)

•
•
, ENQ
6··

21
17
11
22

14
12
e

2
20

0
0
0
1
1
1

1
0

NUL

COLUMN

B4 B3 8281 ROW
o

14'
100
6'
146
101
65

146
102
66
147
103
67

153
107
6B'

15.
108
6e
155
108
60

..08

156
110
6'
157
111
6F

165
117
75
166
11.
76
167
11.
77

72
163
116
73
I ••
116
74

150
104
66
151
105
69
152

n
~

DEL

170
120
7.
171

121

79
172
122
7A
173
123
7.
174
12'
7e
175
125
70
176
126

7E
177

127
7F

d~fferences
MR-11134

Spanish Character S~t ,(7-bit)

NOTE

Empty positions are reserved for future use.

BITS,--

COLUMN

1 0

NUL

BEL

10
8
8

1 0

IF
VT

22
18
12

19
13
24
20
14

15
26
22
16

CAN

(

)

25
19

12
10
A

SUB

13
11
8

ESC

27
18

34
28
1C

15
13
0

35
29
10

16
14

DECIMAL

HEX

Figure 28:

62
50
32

102
66
42

63
51

103
67
43
104

33
64

65
53
35

105
69

46
38
26
47

66
54
36

106
70

67
55
37

H
I

50
40
28
51
41

52
34

7
8

56
71

57
39

68
44

140

122
82
52

123
83

126
86

146
102
66
147
103
67

166
118
76
167
119

127

110
72
48

130
88
58

150
104
68

111

131

151
105
69

132
90
SA

152
106
6A

153
107
68

173

154
108
6C
155
109
60

174
124
7C

175

176
126

DEL

177

73
112

87
57

8'
59

74
60
3C

114
76
4C

75
61
3D

115

134
92
5C
135
93
50

165
117
75

54
44
2C

163

115

74
4A

77
40

145
101
65

133

77
63
3F

143
99
63

85
55

162
114
72

125

113
75
48

142
98
62

164
116

161
113

144
100
64

73
59
38

141
97
61

;

160
112
70

124
84
54

96
60

107

72
58
3A

42
2A

46
2E

KEY

101
65
41

120
80
50
121
81
51

ASCII CHARACTERETIJ33 OCTAL

1
0

5
100

44
36
24
45
37
25

31
1F

42
34
22
43
35
23

1E
37

17
15

33
21

14
12
C

60
48
30
61
49
31

1
0

3
40
32
20
41

3'
27

21
17
11

6
6
6
7
7
7

DC3

IXOFF)

4
5
5
5

~XON)

DC1

3
3
3
4

2
2
2

ENQ

0
1

2
20

1
0

1
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
1

84838261 ROW

0
0

116
78

91
58

136
94

117
79

137
95

m
n

156
110

157
111
6F

171
121
79
172
122
7A

123
78

125
70

170
120
78

127
7F

Highlights. differences
from ASCII

MR-11141

Swedish Character Set (7:-bit)

NOTE
Empty positions are reserved for future use.

·aITS
84 83 82 81 r.row
o 0 0

••

•

1·0

1
•

•
1

1
1 1

• ••
••
•
I

1 0

DC3 1923
(XOFF)

13
24
20

3
3
3

3··

•••

5
5

18
12

6
6

I.
8
8

12
I.

31
26

)

51
41

sua

3'
26

,.
•
ESC
"
•
33

15
13
0

13
•

• ".
1

,.
10
36
30
IE
37

I.
14

15
F

"
IF

KEY
ASCII CHARACTEREIT]33 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

34
65
53
35
66
54·
36

6'
56
37
70
56
38
71

'C
56
45
'0
56
46
'E

D
E
F
G

;

<
=

3.
74
60
3C

61
30

114

'"'6'

102
66
42
103

43
104

105
69
45
106

46
I.'

II.

'8
111
13
'9
1I2
74
'A
113

T
U

V
W

54
125

85
56
126
66

'"
81

"
130

• ,.,

161
113
71

..
..

131

13'

•

I:>.'
9'
50
135
93
'0
136
94
5E
13'
.5
SF

9,
61
I.,

143

14.

'.5

166
118
'6
161
119

14'
103

150
104
68
151
105
68

k
1

m
n
0

72
163
I1S
'3
I.'
116

16'

II.

100

102
66

'"70

..
.. •
.. "
,.,
.,

, '"

SA
133
91
5.

,. 8

7
·'40

180

123
83
53
12.

121
81

a
b

....

•

120

'".,

,. e
••

7.
'C
I1S

1
1

'6
6'
3E

•
5

100

'0
116
'8
'E

.8
3A

53
'3
'8
54

33
6•

50
40
28

30
24

38
26
39
21

8
8

36
24
45
3'

(

•,

CAN

'3
36
'3

30
61
•9
31

.,
"

" ..,.

25
21
15

•

14
12
C

••

1 I

33
21

13
II

21
17
11

IXONI

••

. •
.,. a

3
0

1
1
1

40
3'
20

•

I.I. SP

•
•• DC1
,,
1
I
I

• •
I

NUL

•

COLUMN

•••
•• • ,
••
•• •
I

••

•

15'
106
6A
153

,.,
••

15.
108
.C
156
109
.0
156

Y
Z

17.

120

121
18

0
ii

II. i.i
6E
157
III
6F

'",.

DEL

123

114

124
1C
175
125
10
176
126
'E

127
1F

Highlights differences
from ASCII

MR-l0954

Figure 29:

Swiss Character Set (7-bit)

NOTE
Empty positions are reserved for future use.

BITS
ROW

o 0

0 0

o 0 1 0
o 0
0

1 1 0

1 1

o 0

1 0

0
1

1
0

DC3

21
15
26
22

CR
SO
51

S
%

61
49

62
50

24
45
37

38
26
47
39

3
4

5
6
7
8

)

32
26

lA
33
27

31
1F

KEY
27

DECIMAL

HEX

41
29

*
+

52
42
2A
53
43
28
54
44
2C
55
45
20
56
46
57

33
64
52
34
65
53
35
66
54
36
67
55
37
70
56
38
71

72
58
3A

;

73
59
38
74
60
3C

<
=

61
3D
76
62

5
100
64
40
101
65
41
102
66
42
103
67

P
Q

R
S

104

105
6.
45

106
70

107
71
47

110
72
48

111
73
49

112

113
75
48
114
76
4C
115

L
M

74
4A

40
116
78
4'
117

7'
4F

120
80
50
121
81

122
82
52
123
83
53
124
84
54
125
85
55
126

56
127
87
57
130
88
58
131
8.

a
b
C

e
f

9
h
i

[
\

]
A

132
90
5A
133
91
58
134
92
5C
135
93
50
136
94
137

140
96
60
141
97
61
142
9B
62
143
9.
63
144
100
64
145
101
65
146
102
66
147
103
67
150
104
68
151
105
6.

P
q
r
S

t
U

153
107
68

{

154
108
6C
155
109
60

m
n
0

156
110
6'
157
111
6F

160
112
70
161
113
71
162
114
72
163
115
73
164
116
74
165
117

75
166
118
76
167
11.
77

152
106
6A

(

10
36
30
IE
37

17
15
F

43
35
23
44

50
40
28

34
28
lC

16
14

20
41
33
21
42
34

4
60
48

ASCII CHARACTER E T I J 3 3 OCTAL

Figure 30:

15
13
0

30
24
18
25
19

11
8
14
12
C

ESC

o 1

16
27

23
19
13
24

SUB

17
11

12
10
A

18
12
(XOFF)

2
20
16
10

2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7

•

BEL

DC1
(XON)

CAN

1 1 1

1
0

1
0
0
0
1
1
1

10
8
8
11
9
9

1 1 0

ENQ

o 1 1

NUL

1 0

o 0

1 0

COLUMN

B4 83 62 81
0

}

DEL

170
120
78
171
121

79
172
122
7A
173
123
78
174
124
7C
175
125
70
176
126
7E
177
127
7F

Highlights differences

from ASCII

MA-11142

United Kingdom Character Set (7-bit)

NOTE
Empty positions are reserved for future use.

DEC 8-bit
MUL TlNATIONAL
CHARACTER

«
z
«
u

e
A
e
A

,U'0
A

c,!).

"8'

a::
z

I
£

!!?

«
0.

,,
- l
Ul

0
"u

., ,

]
{

'Ii

l.i
Jl

I-

::>

".:

mrn

Figure 31:

::i

I
I

«
::::;
«

{

]

e
e,

[

, ,I

NOTE:

~.I) "'"''''''''
~
displayed as y

]

a
e

[

- l' -

s:Ul

I-

::>

r -

!::

·Ii

[

N \

..A \

£
§

#
@

{
]

z
«
:;;;
a::

a::

#
@

Z
I

(

W
C,!)

.J.J
ww
cece

C,!)C,!)

""
u

-zz

:;:

:;;;z
WW
.Ja::

- L

!!?

z
z

I-I

!!?u

a,
1

it-·

7-bit NATIONAL
REPLACEMENT
CHARACTER

is displayed as

.., is displayed as "

( US VERSION, NOT SHOWN,
DOES NOT USE NRC)

MA-11082

7-bit/DEC8-bit Translations

BITS
84 13 82 8' r;,;w
o 0 o 0

• ••
•

•

0
0

NUL

•

0
0
1
1
1

DC1
(XONI

o 1 0

o 1 1 0
0

1 1 1

•

0 0

•

1 0

,."

31
25
18

1 1 0

1 1 1

"10 SUB
A
VT 1311 ESC
LF

3.
26
lA
33

•

,..,
34

15
13
0

80
81

••"

••

,.
14

37
31

15
F

KEY
ASCII CHARACTER E J ] 3 3 OCTAL
27
DECIMAL
18

HEX

••••

31)

311

••

45
37

, .,
(

39
.7
50
40

66
54
311

5.
4'
,A

53
.3

;

53
35

.,..

37
70

F
G

....

103
6'
'3
104

105

'".,.,
••

122
5'
"3

••

'"••

5.
125
85

126
55
12>

., W .,

10'
71

..
.

131)

111
73
48

131

112

13.

71
57

<
•
> ••3.
••
80

55
45
.0
55

.,
..

••

'A
113

L
M
N

"',. In
4C
115
77

5A
133
81
58
134

143

• ..

.
.,
..

,
'"
"
,.

11.

165

145
102

166
116

147
103

,.7
11.

150
11/4

170
120

151
106

121

IS'

••

163
,.7

'14

1S7

111
OF

,
'"

•• "

106
.A

"
"'

162

"5
101

- '"

'0
181
113

163
115
73

100
M

155
100
.0
155
110

180

.. • ,.,

50
138

••

I.,

135

••

• ..., q

154
108

.0
11.
7.
4E

140

,.,

4.
106
70

80
50

3.
14

•5

120

,.,
"
I.,

5
P

110
'2

100

47
'F

••5'

51
41

5'
34

)

..
IS

•,.

50
3.
.3
51
33

3D
IE

•

'7
23

4
80

••,.

••

• BS •• CAN ••
• HT ••

o 1 1
o •

••.,

4
5
5
5

•
•

0
•

•3

(XOFF)

7
10

0
0

0
1

,. SP

o 0

••
••
•
"
• DC3 ,.
••
••

• •
3

COLUMN

0
1

DEL

172
22
'A

.,.
".
'.3
7.

124
'C

126
70

'"
126

7E
177
12>
7F

.High,ights differences
from ASCII

MR·10955

Figure 32:

Dutch Character Set (7-bi t)

NOTE
Empty positions are reserved for future use.

Rainbow™ 100 + 11 OOB
Terminal Emulation
Manual
QV069-GZ

READER'S COMMENTS

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized? Please make suggestions for
improvement.

Did you find errors in this manual? If so, specify the error and the page number.

Please indicate the type of reader that you most nearly represent.

D First-time computer user
D Experienced computer user
D Application package user
D Programmer
D Other (please specify), _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Name_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___
Date'_____________________________________
Organization_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Street~

___________________________________

City,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Statei_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Zip Code
orCount~'---------------------------------

I
I
I
I
I

---~-.--0
00

id
mN.otoTear t- FOa

HDe~ and T.~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Trnn--------~~~~~~; ---i
if Mailed in the
United States

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 33 MAYNARD MASS.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

SOFTWARE PUBLICATIONS

200 FOREST STREET MR01-2/L 12
MARLBOROUGH, MA 01752

- - - -

Do Not Tear - Fold Here and Tape - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -